JP2018079111A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which can leave a possibility of an advantageous position being raised in performance, thereby boosting the expectation for the performance, and thus enhancing the attractiveness of the game.SOLUTION: The main CPU can store skill points according to a combination determined to be a winning combination during a period from CZ1 to 13G (S69) and can determine by a final game ART lottery whether or not changeover to ART is performed based on the skill points in the 14G-th CZ (S70). Even when it is determined by the final game ART lottery that the changeover to ART is not performed and a performance according to the determination result is carried out, the main CPU performs a final game revival lottery based on the winning combination in the 14G-th CZ (S72), and when the final game revival lottery is won, the main CPU executes a revival performance to the effect that the changeover to ART is done.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 98

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

  Conventionally, it is detected that a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on each surface, a game medal, a coin, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “medal, etc.”) are operated and the start lever is operated by the player. , A start switch that requests the start of rotation of a plurality of reels and a stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels is detected by the player, and the rotation of the corresponding reel is requested to stop. A step switch based on the signals output from the start switch and the stop switch, and a stop switch that outputs a signal to perform, a stepping motor that is provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and transmits each driving force to each reel. A reel control unit that controls the operation of the motor and rotates and stops each reel, and the start lever is operated. Is detected, the lottery is performed based on the random number value, and the rotation of the reel is determined based on the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “internal winning combination”) and the timing at which the stop button is detected. A so-called pachislot machine that stops is known.

  This type of conventional gaming machine is provided with a so-called chance zone (hereinafter referred to as “CZ”), points are given until the CZ is completed, and whether or not the points exceed a predetermined value in the final game of the CZ. In some cases, a so-called assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”) is set as a carryover point. According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by acquiring many points with CZ (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-151020 A

  However, in the above conventional gaming machine, if a point exceeding a predetermined value is not obtained in CZ, there is a risk that the feeling of expectation may be lost due to a low effect on the stage of production, which may reduce the interest of the game. There were difficulties.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the production state by leaving the possibility that the advantage in production will be high, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. The purpose is to provide a machine.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

A gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a pachislot machine 1 described later)
A plurality of symbols are drawn, and a plurality of reels that rotate for each unit game (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R described later),
A symbol display area (for example, a display window 4 described later) for displaying a part of the symbols drawn on the reels;
At the start of a unit game, a winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a plurality of small combinations (for example, a small combination described later) and a plurality of re-playing combinations (for example, a replay described later). For example, a main CPU 93 described later)
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the timing of the stop operation on the reel, the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation is stopped to thereby display the plurality of symbols in the symbol display area. Stop control means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) for stopping and displaying a part of
Production state control means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) capable of shifting a plurality of production states;
With
The production state control means includes:
In a predetermined period (for example, a CZ1-13 game described later) in a first effect state (for example, CZ described later) among the plurality of effect states, a predetermined value is determined according to the combination determined as the internal winning combination. Point accumulation means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) capable of accumulating performance points (for example, technique points described later);
After the elapse of the predetermined period in the first effect state (for example, a CZ14 game, which will be described later), the second effect state (from the first effect state to the second effect state (based on the predetermined effect point) ( For example, an effect state provision determining means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) capable of determining whether or not to provide an ART described later)
Effect control means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) for controlling a predetermined effect according to the result determined by the effect state giving determination means;
Including
Even if it determines that the said 2nd production state is not provided after the said predetermined period progress in the said 1st production state, the said production | presentation state provision determination means will carry out predetermined | prescribed resurrection lottery (for example, according to the said internal winning combination) The final game revival lottery described below is performed, and when the predetermined revival lottery is won, it can be determined that the second effect state is to be given.

  According to such a gaming machine, even if it is determined that the predetermined effect points accumulated in the predetermined period of the first effect state are relatively few and the second effect state is not given after the predetermined period has elapsed, the predetermined period When winning with a predetermined rebirth lottery according to the internal winning combination after the lapse, the effect that the second effect state is given is performed, so the expectation of the effect state by leaving the possibility that the advantage in the effect will be increased Can be increased.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The point accumulating unit is configured to perform a period from the predetermined initial game (for example, the CZ1 game) in the first effect state to the game immediately before the final game (for example, the CZ13 game) for the predetermined period. In the above, the predetermined production points can be accumulated,
The effect state assignment determining means is configured to determine the first effect point based on the predetermined effect point regardless of the internal winning combination in the final game (for example, CZ14 game) after the predetermined period has elapsed. While it is possible to determine whether or not to give two stage effects, it is possible to determine that the second stage state is to be given based on the result of the predetermined revival lottery according to the internal winning combination. To do.

  According to such a configuration, from the first game in the first production state to the game immediately before the final game, predetermined production points are accumulated according to the internal winning combination, while the final game in the first production state Then, it is determined whether or not to give the second effect state using the predetermined effect points accumulated regardless of the winning combination, and even if it is determined not to give it, the internal winning combination in the final game is determined. Accordingly, there is a possibility that the second effect state is given by a predetermined rebirth lottery. As a result, the internal winning combination determined repeatedly from the first stage of the first stage state to the final game can be effectively used for lottery in the stage, and the directing according to the internal winning combination without leaving the first game to the final game. Can be executed.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the expectation with respect to a production | presentation state can be raised by leaving the possibility that an advantage on production will become high, and the game machine which can raise the interest of a game by extension can be provided.

It is a figure which shows the functional flow of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. 1 is an overall perspective view showing an external structure of a pachislot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded view of the upper door of the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. 1 is a partially exploded view of a base of a pachislot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded view of the accessory device of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of the 1st movable part of the accessory apparatus in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view of the accessory device of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear view of the accessory device of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachislot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the main control circuit of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the sub control circuit of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of the accessory apparatus of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of the accessory apparatus of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of the accessory apparatus of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of the accessory apparatus of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation of the accessory apparatus of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation of the accessory apparatus of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation of the accessory apparatus of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game state flow of the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a figure explaining the appearance state flow of the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a figure explaining the symbol arrangement | sequence table of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the symbol code table of the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a figure explaining the symbol combination table (special role) of the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a figure explaining the symbol combination table (re-playing combination) of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the symbol combination table (winning combination) of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the symbol combination table (winning combination) of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the symbol combination table (RT transition) of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the internal lottery table (setting 1, non-MB) of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the internal lottery table (setting 1, in MB) of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the priority order selection table | surface of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the winning combination command navigation number correspondence table of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the navigation correspondence table | surface of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the lottery group correspondence table | surface of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the lottery state lottery classification correspondence table of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the lottery state lottery type use random number correspondence table of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game lock number correspondence table | surface of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the [normal] ISM mode transfer lottery table (setting 1) of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the ISM mode transfer lottery table (setting 1) after the [normal] setting change of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the [normal] ISM acquisition lottery table (setting 1) of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the [normal] CZ lottery state transfer lottery table (setting 1) of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the [normal] CZ lottery table (setting 1) of the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a figure explaining the [normal] ART lottery table of the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a figure explaining the [CZ1] CZ classification lottery table of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the [CZ1] boss lottery table (setting 1) of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the [CZ1-13G] technique point lottery table (setting 1) of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the [CZ14G] final game ART lottery table (setting 1) of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the [CZ14G] final game restoration lottery table (setting 1) of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the [EXCZ] game number addition lottery table (setting 1) of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the [ART1,2,3,4] level-up lottery table (ART1) of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the [ART1,2,3,4] level-up lottery table (ART2) of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the [ART1,2,3,4] level-up lottery table (ART3) of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the [ART1,2,3,4] level-up lottery table (ART4) of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the [ART1,2,3,4] level-up lottery table (ART4 (previous ART5)) of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the [ART2] loop guarantee number lottery table (setting 1) of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the [ART4] victory reward lottery table of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the [ART5] addition state transfer lottery table (setting 1) of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining [ART5] addition lottery A table (normal) of the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a figure explaining [ART5] addition lottery A table (high accuracy) of the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a figure explaining the [ART5] addition lottery A table (ultra-high accuracy) of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining [ART5] addition lottery B table (setting 1) of the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a figure explaining the [ART5] special addition lottery table of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the [ART5] addition game number lottery table (tables 1-7) of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the [ART5] addition special stock lottery A table (setting 1) of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining [ART5] addition special stock lottery B table (normal) of the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a figure explaining the [ART5] addition special stock lottery B table (high accuracy) of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the [ART5] addition special stock lottery B table (ultra high accuracy) of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the [ALL] PTR classification lottery table of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the [normal, CZ] ART grade lottery table (CZ, direct hit, BB2) of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the [usual, ART5] precursor game number lottery table (setting 1) of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the [ART2,5] loop rate lottery table (setting 1) of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the [ART2,5] loop lottery table (setting 1) of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the reel lock lottery table (setting 1) in PTR of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the fixed CZ point distribution lottery table of the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a figure explaining the CZ music lottery table of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the CZ production category lottery table (1G) of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the CZ production category lottery table (2-10G eyes) of the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a figure explaining the CZ production category lottery table (11G eyes) of the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a figure explaining the battle point double lottery table of the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a figure explaining the CZ enemy character defeat A content lottery table of the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a figure explaining the CZ aura acquisition lottery table of the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a figure explaining the CZ aura content lottery table of the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a figure explaining the CZ effect content lottery (frame frame) table of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the CZ effect content lottery (shutter) table of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the CZ small window Kell lottery table of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the CZ enemy appearance lottery table of the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a figure explaining the CZ battle technique decision lottery table of the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a figure explaining the CZ enemy judge lottery table of the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a figure explaining the CZ push button color lottery table of the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a figure explaining the EXCZ production category lottery table of the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a figure explaining the EXCZ aim content lottery table of the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a figure explaining the EXCZ frame hula content lottery table of the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a figure explaining the EXCZ final turning lottery table of the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a figure explaining the EXCZ navi kind lottery table of the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a figure explaining the EXCZ pseudo | simulation navigation push order lottery table of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control process of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the payout state control process of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of a normal start of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start in CZ of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start in EXCZ of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of start in ART of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of start in ART of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the ART preparation preparation of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop initial setting process of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop control process of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the BB check process of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the BB check process of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the MB check process of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows RT check processing of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the appearance condition check process of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the appearance condition check process of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the appearance condition check process of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the sub side navigation effect control process of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the winning combination and the symbol display mode of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the display mode in CZ of the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the internal level in ART of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention, and production content.

<Functional flow of pachislot machine>
A pachislot machine which is a gaming machine showing an embodiment of the present invention will be described. First, a functional flow according to the embodiment of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the pachi-slot machine of the present embodiment, medals are used as game media for performing unit games (games). In addition to the medals, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, or the like can be applied as game media.

  As a predetermined start condition, when a player inserts a medal and the start lever is operated, one value (hereinafter referred to as an internal lottery random value) is selected from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535). ) Is extracted.

  The internal lottery means performs lottery based on the extracted random number for internal lottery and determines an internal winning combination. The internal lottery means is a main control circuit described later. By determining the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols that permits display along a winning determination line described later is determined. Note that the types of symbol combinations are those related to “winning” in which a player is given a privilege such as medal payout, re-game operation, bonus operation, etc. And those related to other so-called “losing”. Roles that can be determined as an internal winning combination and are given bonuses when winning a prize include small roles related to the payout of medals (bells, watermelons, cherries), replaying roles related to replay operations, and bonus operations There are special roles (BB, MB). A combination of symbols displayed at the time of transition of the game state or the game state other than the combination is referred to as a transition or spilled eye. When a role other than losing is determined as an internal winning combination, it is also referred to as internal winning or simply winning. “Winning” means that the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is established or established, but that the combination of symbols relating to the transition or spilling is displayed along the winning determination line indicates that “winning” It is simply called the establishment or establishment of the display.

  Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. Thereafter, when the player presses the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel, the reel stop control means performs control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. Do.

  In the pachislot machine, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec or 75 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within the specified time is referred to as “the number of sliding symbols”. When the specified time is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols is set to 4 symbols, and when the specified time is 75 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols is set to 1 symbol.

  When the internal winning combination allowing the symbol combination display related to winning is determined, the reel stop control means usually displays the symbol combination within the specified time of 190 msec (four symbols) for the winning determination line. The rotation of the reel is stopped so as to display as much as possible. In addition, the reel stop control means is defined for one or more reels when, for example, a challenge bonus (CB), which is a second-type special accessory, and a middle bonus (MB) for continuously operating the CB are operated. The reel rotation is stopped so that the combination of symbols is displayed as much as possible along the winning determination line within a time of 75 msec (for one symbol). Furthermore, the reel stop control means uses various specified times corresponding to the gaming state to rotate the reels so that combinations of symbols that are not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination are not displayed along the winning determination line. Stop.

  Thus, when the rotation of the plurality of reels is all stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the winning determination line is related to winning or shifting. This winning determination means is carried out by a main control circuit described later. When it is determined by the winning determination means that the game is related to winning or shifting, a privilege such as paying out medals is granted, or the gaming state or the playing state is shifted. In a pachislot machine, a series of flows as described above is performed as one game. Such internal lottery means, reel stop control means, and winning determination means are performed by a main control circuit as symbol variation starting means, winning combination determining means, stop control means, and gaming state control means, which will be described later.

  Also, in the pachislot machine, in the above-described series of flows, video display by an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device, driving of an accessory device, output of light by various lamps, output of sound by a speaker, Alternatively, various effects are performed using these combinations. As an effect, there is a case where a so-called push order instruction (navigation effect) is given to instruct the pushing order of the stop operation on the reels.

  When the start lever is operated, an effect random number value (hereinafter referred to as effect random number value) is extracted separately from the internal lottery random value used to determine the internal winning combination. When the effect random number value is extracted, the effect content determining means determines, by lottery, what is to be executed this time from among a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination.

  When the contents of the effect are determined, the effect execution means executes the corresponding effect in conjunction with each opportunity, such as when the reel starts rotating, when the rotation of each reel stops, or when determining whether or not there is a winning (display establishment). . In this way, in the pachislot machine, the opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) by executing the production contents associated with the internal winning combination etc. It is provided to the player and the player's interest can be improved. Further, by controlling so as to execute or not execute a navigation effect such as a push order instruction, the so-called play rate can be indirectly varied. The effect content determining means related to the payout rate is handled by a main control circuit as an effect state control means described later, and the effect executing means is assigned by a sub control circuit as an effect control means described later.

<Pachislot machine structure>
Next, with reference to FIG. 2, the external structure of the pachislot machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is an overall perspective view showing the external structure of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes an exterior body 2. The exterior body 2 includes a cabinet 2a serving as a housing that accommodates a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b serving as a frame that is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be opened and closed. Handles 2c are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (only the handle 2c on one side is shown in FIG. 2). The handle 2c is a recess that is put on when the pachislot machine 1 is transported.

  Inside the cabinet 2a are accommodated a plurality (three in this embodiment) of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of (for example, 21) symbols are displayed at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction. ing.

  Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. The above-mentioned plural (for example, 21) symbols are drawn on the surface of the aforementioned sheet material.

  The front door 2b includes an upper door 9a, a lower door 9b, and a liquid crystal display device 11 as an image display unit that is attached to the upper door 9a and displays an image. The front door 2b is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left end of the cabinet 2a when the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front of the pachi-slot machine 1.

  FIG. 3 is an exploded view of the upper door of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. The upper door 9a is formed of a synthetic resin material and is a base 9a- integrally formed with the front panel 5 disposed on the front surface facing the player (the front side of the pachislot machine 1 and facing the player). 1 and a cover 9a-2 disposed on the back surface (the surface opposite to the front surface) of the base 9a-1, and the accessory device 8 is provided between the base 9a-1 and the cover 9a-2. Is arranged.

  FIG. 4 is a partially exploded view of the base of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. In the base 9a-1, a component that operates when energized (for example, an LED substrate on which an LED (Light Emitting Diode) is disposed) is disposed on the back side of the front panel 5. The front panel 5 has fixed decorative portions 5a, 5b, and 5c formed on the front side so as to protrude to different positions. LED substrates 72 (72a, 72b, 72c) are arranged on the back sides of the fixed decorative portions 5a, 5b, 5c, respectively. LED board 72a, 72b, 72c is distribute | arranged to the position which adjoins fixed decoration part 5a, 5b, 5c, respectively, and is distribute | arranged in the mutually different position in the front back surface direction.

  The base 9a-1 is provided with a metal piece 73 for grounding the LED substrates 72a, 72b, 72c. The metal piece 73 is formed of a plate-like body extending in a direction (for example, horizontal direction) in which the LED substrates 72a, 72b, and 72c are arranged, and a member (for example, a metal screw or the like) formed of a material that can be energized. Are connected to the LED substrates 72a, 72b, 72c.

  The metal piece 73 is an earth 73a that is an example of a connection part that is arranged and connected at a position close to the LED board 72a, and an earth 73b that is an example of a connection part that is arranged and connected at a position near the LED board 72b. An earth 73c, which is an example of a connecting part arranged and connected in the vicinity of the LED substrate 72c, a connecting part 73e formed of a material that can be energized by connecting the earth 73a and the earth 73c to the earth 73b, and an earth 73d and a grounding 73c, respectively, and a terminal portion 73d for flowing electricity flowing through the metal piece 73 to the outside.

  In the present embodiment, the fixed decorative portion 5b is disposed more on the front side than the fixed decorative portions 5a and 5c. For this reason, the LED substrate 72b is arranged on the front side more than the LED substrates 72a and 72c. And as for the metal piece 73, the earth 73b protrudes in the front side rather than the earth 73a and the earth 73c. Such a ground 73b is an example of a protrusion, and the metal piece 73 is an example of a metal piece that is connected to a plurality of parts and has a protrusion that protrudes in the front direction depending on the position where the parts are arranged. is there.

  The ground 73b is disposed substantially at the center of the metal piece 73, has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front surface, and is formed by bending a plate-like body into a substantially U-shape with the back surface opened when viewed from the top surface. It is fitted in a rectangular hole formed on the back side of the panel 5. By fixing the metal piece 73 to the front panel 5 in this way, it is possible to prevent the screw etc. from being loosened due to vibration or the like, the metal piece 73 being displaced in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the left and right end portions from being rotated. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 3, the cover 9 a-2 is disposed on the back side of the base 9 a-1 and is energized by the LED boards 72 a, 72 b, 72 c (see FIG. 4) and the like disposed on the back side of the front panel 5. The metal piece 73 (see FIG. 4) for grounding the operating parts and the LED boards 72a, 72b, 72c and the like is covered. Further, a control board such as a sub-control board 42 (see FIG. 9) to be described later is housed and attached to the cover 9a-2 in a protective case.

<Equipment>
Next, the accessory device 8 will be described. FIG. 5 is an exploded view of the accessory device of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. The dashed-dotted line shown in FIG. 5 is a line which shows the member which mutually engages or contacts. In the following description, the left is the left when viewed from the front (front) side of the pachislot machine 1, and the right is the right when viewed from the front (front) side of the pachislot machine 1. Further, in FIG. 5, only the outer shape of the decorative part is indicated by a dotted line for easy understanding.

  The accessory device 8, which is an example of a movable accessory, includes decorative parts (lower middle decorative part 861, lower left decorative part 862, lower right decorative part 863, upper middle decorative part 864, upper left decorative part 865, and upper right decorative part. 866), a non-movable portion 81 that supports the movable portion 82 so as to be movable in a predetermined direction (for example, up and down direction and left and right direction) extending parallel to a plane facing the player, and movable And a drive unit 83 that moves the unit 82.

  The non-movable part 81 is disposed on the first base 811 disposed on one side (for example, the right side) on the plane facing the player and on the other side (for example, the left side) on the plane facing the player. A connection base 813 disposed between the second base 812, the first base 811 and the second base 812, one end connected to the first base 811 and the other end connected to the second base 812; And a central base 814 disposed on the front surface side.

  The first base 811 extends in a direction (for example, the vertical direction) orthogonal to the direction (for example, the horizontal direction) in which the connection base 813 extends, and the first guide 811a, the second guide 811b, and the third guide extend in the orthogonal direction. 811c. The first guide 811a, the second guide 811b, and the third guide 811c have a groove that penetrates in the front-rear direction and an engaging member that slidably engages with the groove. The first guide 811a and the second guide 811b are arranged on the same line in the orthogonal direction. The third guide 811c is arranged in parallel with the first guide 811a and the second guide 811b in the direction in which the connection base 813 extends. The first rectangular portion 821 of the first movable portion 820 in the movable portion 82 described later is engaged with the engaging members of the first guide 811a, the second guide 811b, and the third guide 811c. Further, the first base 811 is provided with a first drive unit 870 of a drive unit 83 described later and a stopper 815 described later.

  The second base 812 extends in a direction (for example, the vertical direction) orthogonal to the direction (for example, the horizontal direction) in which the connection base 813 extends. The second base 812 includes a contact surface 812a that extends in the orthogonal direction and faces the back, and can contact a roller 825 of the first movable unit 820 in the movable unit 82 described later. Such a second base 812 is an example of a member extending in the vertical direction.

  The connection base 813 is arranged in a left guide 813a and a right guide 813b extending in the direction in which the connection base 813 extends (for example, in the left-right direction), and in a direction substantially orthogonal to the direction in which the connection base 813 extends (for example, in the vertical direction). A gear 813c, a first engaging portion 813d, and a second engaging portion 813e.

  The left guide 813a and the right guide 813b are each provided as a pair. The pair of left guides 813a and the pair of right guides 813b are arranged in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the connection base 813 extends (for example, the vertical direction), extend in parallel, and penetrate through the front and rear surfaces. And an engaging member that is slidably engaged. The gear 813c is disposed between the first engaging portion 813d and the second engaging portion 813e. A second movable portion 830 in the movable portion 82 described later is engaged with the engaging members of the pair of left guides 813a. The engaging member of the pair of right guides 813b is engaged with a third movable part 840 in the movable part 82 described later. The gear 813c engages with a rack 830b of the second movable portion 830 and a rack 840b of the third movable portion 840 in the movable portion 82 described later. The first engaging portion 813d is slidably engaged with a groove 830a of the second movable portion 830 in the movable portion 82 described later. The second engaging portion 813e is slidably engaged with a groove 840a of the third movable portion 840 in the movable portion 82 described later. The connection base 813 is provided with a second drive unit 880 of the drive unit 83 described later.

  The center base 814 has a pair of guides 814a arranged in a direction (for example, the left-right direction) in which the connection base 813 extends. Each of the pair of guides 814a extends in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the connection base 813 extends (for example, the vertical direction), penetrates in the front-rear direction, and an engagement member that slidably engages with the grooves. Have. A pair of guides 814a is engaged with an upper middle support portion 854 described later.

  The movable portion 82 has a first movable portion 820 that can move in a direction (for example, a vertical direction that is an example of a predetermined direction) orthogonal to a direction (for example, the left-right direction) in which the connection base 813 extends, and a direction in which the connection base 813 extends. A second movable part 830 movable in parallel with the second movable part 830 in a direction in which the connection base 813 extends, and movable in a direction opposite to the second movable part 830 in the direction in which the connection base 813 extends. A third movable part 840.

  The first movable portion 820 has a first rectangular portion 821 formed with a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the coupling base 813 extends (for example, the vertical direction) as a longitudinal direction, and an end portion connected to the first rectangular portion. 2nd rectangular part 824 extended in the direction (for example, right-and-left direction) which extends. The first movable portion 820 is formed in a substantially T shape by the first rectangular portion 821 and the second rectangular portion 824. In the example shown in FIG. 5, the first movable portion 820 is arranged so as to be movable in the vertical direction. Therefore, the first movable portion 820 is formed in a shape having a substantially T-shape when viewed from the front side. Yes.

  The first rectangular portion 821 is engaged with the engaging members of the first guide 811a, the second guide 811b, and the third guide 811c of the first base 811 in the non-movable portion 81. That is, the first rectangular portion 821 has two locations, the first guide 811a and the second guide 811b arranged in the moving direction (for example, the vertical direction) of the movable portion 82, and a direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the movable portion 82 ( For example, in the left-right direction), the first guide 811a and the third guide 811c arranged in parallel with the second guide 811b are movably supported by the non-movable part 81. The movable portion 82 including the first rectangular portion 821 is movably supported by the non-movable portion 81 at two locations of the first guide 811a and the second guide 811b arranged in the vertical direction. Due to the weight of the members attached to the part 82 and the rotating part 82, it is possible to prevent the front part and the rear part from rotating. Further, the movable portion 82 is formed in a shape having a substantially T-shape when viewed from the front side, and has a cantilever structure in which only the first rectangular portion 821 is engaged with the non-movable portion 81, thereby saving space. Is possible. In this case, the movable portion 82 generates a rotational force with the first rectangular portion 821 as the center and the tip of the second rectangular portion 824 moving downward due to gravity. According to the present embodiment, the movable portion 82 including the first rectangular portion 821 has two locations, the first guide 811a and the second guide 811b arranged in the vertical direction, and the first guide 811a and the second guide in the horizontal direction. Since the third guide 811c parallel to 811b is supported by the non-movable part 81 so as to be movable, it is possible to prevent the movable part 82 from rotating due to the rotational force.

  FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the first movable part of the accessory device in the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. In FIG. 6, the first movable portion 820 moves upward from the state shown in FIG. 6A, and then enters the state shown in FIG. 6C through the state shown in FIG. 6B and stops. . As shown in FIG. 6A, the first rectangular portion 821 of the first movable portion 820 includes a rack portion 822 that extends in the direction in which the first rectangular portion 821 extends (for example, the vertical direction), and a first rectangular portion 821. And a plurality of protrusions 823 arranged in the extending direction (for example, the vertical direction).

  The plurality of protrusions 823 are the uppermost position in the vertical movement range of the first movable part 820, and the first protrusion 823A locked to a stopper 815 described later and the vertical movement of the first movable part 820. A second protrusion 823B that is locked to the stopper 815 at an intermediate position between the uppermost position and the lowermost position in the range. The projecting portion 823 is in a state where the first movable portion 820 is stopped (the state shown in FIG. 6C), and a lower surface 823a that abuts on a contact surface 817a of a stopper 815, which will be described later, and one side above the lower surface 823a. Side surface that can be slidably contacted with a sliding surface 817b of a stopper 815, which will be described later, in a process in which the first movable portion 820 is inclined downward from the first side to the other side (the state shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B). 823b.

  The first base 811 of the non-movable part 81 is provided with a stopper 815 that locks the plurality of protrusions 823 and restricts the movement of the first movable part 820 in the movable part 82. The stopper 815 is in the locked state (the state shown in FIG. 6C) for locking the protrusion 823 or in the unlocked state in which the locked state is released (the state shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B). Can be changed. The stopper 815 can be moved from the other side to one side or from one side to the other side by a solenoid 816 controlled by a sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 11) described later. A locking portion 817 that abuts against the protruding portion 823, and a biasing member 818 that biases the locking portion 817 to the other side.

  The locking portion 817 is a contact surface 817a that contacts the lower surface 823a of the protrusion 823 in the locked state (the state shown in FIG. 6C), and descends from one side to the other side below the contact surface 817a. In the process of inclining and moving the first movable part 820 upward (the state shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B), a sliding contact surface 817b that can slide on the side surface 823b of the protrusion 823 is provided.

  When the movable portion 82 moves downward, the stopper 815 has the solenoid 816 controlled by the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 11), the locking portion 817 is moved from the other side to the one side, and becomes the non-locking state. After the protrusion 823 of the first movable part 820 passes through the locking part 817, the solenoid 816 is controlled by the sub-control circuit 101, and the locking part 817 is moved from one side to the other side to be locked. When the movable portion 82 moves upward, the side surface 823b of the protrusion 823 of the first movable portion 820 is brought into contact with the sliding surface 817b of the locking portion 817 of the stopper 815 from the state shown in FIG. Make sliding contact. Then, the locking portion 817 of the stopper 815 is pressed to the other side by the protrusion 823 of the first movable portion 820, the urging member 818 is elastically deformed and contracted, and moves to the other side, and FIG. It will be in the state shown in That is, the protrusion 823 moves upward from the locking portion 817 against the urging against the locking portion 817. Then, when the protrusion 823 of the first movable portion 820 passes, the locking portion 817 of the stopper 815 is urged by the urging member 818 and moves to one side, and the abutting surface 817a is the first movable portion 820. 6 is in contact with the lower surface 823a of the protrusion 823, and the downward movement of the first movable portion 820 is restricted.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the second rectangular portion 824 includes a left guide 824a and a right guide 824b arranged in a direction in which the second rectangular portion 824 extends (for example, in the left-right direction). Each of the left guide 824a and the right guide 824b extends in a direction in which the second rectangular portion 824 extends (for example, in the left-right direction), penetrates in the front-rear direction, and an engagement member that slidably engages with the groove. Have. A lower left support portion 852 described later is engaged with the engaging member of the left guide 824a. A lower right support portion 853 described later is engaged with the engaging member of the right guide 824b.

  Further, the second rectangular portion 824 has a roller 825 for guiding the movement of the first movable portion 820 in a predetermined direction (for example, the vertical direction) to the other end opposite to the one end connected to the first rectangular portion 821. It is arranged. The roller 825 has a rotation axis extending in a direction (for example, the left-right direction) orthogonal to a predetermined direction in a direction parallel to a plane facing the player, and an outer edge of the roller 825 is a second base in the non-movable portion 81. It is possible to contact the contact surface 812a of 812.

  The second movable portion 830 engages with the engagement members of the pair of left guides 813 a of the connection base 813 in the non-movable portion 81. The second movable portion 830 extends in the direction in which the connection base 813 extends and in the direction of the third movable portion 840 (for example, the right direction), and the first engagement portion 813d of the connection base 813 is slidably engaged. A groove 830a, a rack 830b that is disposed below the groove 830a and engages with the gear 813c of the connection base 813, and a shaft 830c that extends in the vertical direction and engages with an engagement portion 855c of the upper left support portion 855 described later. .

  The third movable portion 840 engages with the engagement members of the pair of right guides 813 b of the connection base 813 in the non-movable portion 81. The third movable portion 840 extends in the direction in which the connection base 813 extends and in the direction of the second movable portion 830 (for example, the left direction), and the second engagement portion 813e of the connection base 813 is slidably engaged. A groove 840a, a rack 840b that is disposed above the groove 840a and engages with the gear 813c of the connection base 813, and a shaft 840c that extends in the vertical direction and engages with an engagement portion 856c of the upper right support portion 856 described later. .

  That is, the rack 830 c of the second movable unit 830 and the rack 840 b of the third movable unit 840 are engaged with the gear 813 c of the connection base 813 in the non-movable unit 81. Accordingly, when the third movable portion 840 moves in a predetermined direction (for example, the left side), the gear 813c that engages with the rack 840b rotates, and this force is transmitted to the rack 830b that engages with the gear 813c. The part 830 moves in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction (for example, the right side).

  As described above, in the non-movable part 81, the two movable parts 82 (the second movable part 830 and the third movable part 840) attached so as to be movable in the extending direction of the non-movable part 81 (the coupling base 813) are respectively associated with each other. Joint portions (rack 830b, rack 840b) are provided, and these engaging portions are engaged with the rotatable rotation engaging portion (gear 813c) of the non-movable portion 81. Thereby, if only one movable part 82 is moved, the other movable part 82 can be moved in conjunction with this. Therefore, since a drive unit for moving one movable unit may be provided, space can be saved as compared with the case where a drive unit for moving each of the two movable units 82 is provided.

  A lower middle support portion 851, a lower left support portion 852, and a lower right support portion 853 are connected to the second rectangular portion 824 of the first movable portion 820 of the movable portion 82. Accordingly, the lower middle support portion 851, the lower left support portion 852, and the lower right support portion 853 are moved in the same direction as the moving direction (for example, the vertical direction) of the first movable portion 820 as the first movable portion 820 moves. Moving.

  The lower middle support portion 851 has a lower back surface fixed to a substantially central position of the second rectangular portion 824 of the first movable portion 820. Further, the lower middle support portion 851 is engaged with a guide 854a of an upper middle support portion 854, which will be described later, on the front surface on the upper end side. The lower middle support portion 851 has a lower middle decorative portion 861 to be described later attached to the front surface thereof.

  The lower left support portion 852 is engaged with the engagement member of the left guide 824a of the second rectangular portion 824 in the first movable portion 820 at the lower back side. Further, the lower left support portion 852 has a front surface on the upper end side engaged with a first guide 855a of an upper left support portion 855 described later. The lower left support portion 852 has a lower left decorative portion 862 to be described later attached to the front surface thereof.

  The lower right support portion 853 is engaged with the engagement member of the right guide 824b of the second rectangular portion 824 in the first movable portion 820 at the lower surface of the lower right support portion 853. Further, the lower right support portion 853 is engaged with a first guide 856a of an upper right support portion 856, which will be described later, on the front surface on the upper end side. The lower right support portion 853 has a lower right decorative portion 863 to be described later attached to the front surface thereof.

  The upper middle support portion 854 has a rear surface on the upper end side engaged with an engagement member of the guide 814a of the central base 814 in the non-movable portion 81, and a front left end side on the upper end side is a second of the upper left support portion 855 described later. Engaged with the engaging member of the guide 855b, the front right end side of the upper end side is engaged with the engaging member of the second guide 856b of the upper right support portion 856 described later. Further, the upper middle support portion 854 has a pair of guides 854a extending in the moving direction (for example, the vertical direction) of the first movable portion 820. The pair of guides 854a are respectively disposed on the left end side and the right end side of the upper middle support portion 854, extend in the moving direction (for example, the vertical direction) of the movable portion 82, and penetrate through the front and rear surfaces. An engaging member that is movably engaged. The upper left side of the lower middle support portion 851 is engaged with the engaging member of the left guide 854a. The upper right side of the lower middle support portion 851 is engaged with the engaging member of the right guide 854a. The upper middle support portion 854 is provided with an upper middle decorative portion 864 described later on the front surface thereof.

  Accordingly, the lower middle support portion 851 is overlapped with the upper middle support portion 854 on the back side of the upper middle support portion 854, and together with the upper middle support portion 854 as the first movable portion 820 of the movable portion 82 moves. The center base 814 moves within the range of the groove length of the guide 814a. The lower middle support portion 851 further moves in the range of the groove length of the guide 854a of the upper middle support portion 854 in accordance with the movement of the first movable portion 820 of the movable portion 82, and the upper middle support portion 854 Projecting in the moving direction of the first movable part 820 from behind.

  The upper left support portion 855 includes a first guide 855a extending in the moving direction (for example, up and down direction) of the first movable portion 820, and a second guide 855b extending in the moving direction (for example, the left and right direction) of the second movable portion 830. , And an engaging portion 855c that is slidably engaged with the shaft 830c of the second movable portion 830. The first guide 855a has a groove that extends in the moving direction (for example, the vertical direction) of the first movable portion 820, penetrates in the front-rear direction, and an engaging member that slidably engages with the groove. The front surface on the upper end side of the lower left support portion 852 is engaged with the engaging member of the first guide 855a. The second guide 855b has a groove that extends in the moving direction (for example, the left-right direction) of the second movable portion 830, penetrates in the front-rear direction, and an engaging member that slidably engages with the groove. The engaging member of the second guide 855b is engaged with the front left end of the upper middle support portion 854 on the upper end side. Accordingly, when the second movable portion 830 moves, the upper left support portion 855 moves in the moving direction (for example, the left-right direction) of the second movable portion 830. Then, when the upper left support portion 855 moves, the lower left support portion 852 moves in the movement direction (for example, the left-right direction) of the second movable portion 830.

  The upper right support portion 856 includes a first guide 856a extending in the moving direction (for example, up and down direction) of the first movable portion 820, and a second guide 856b extending in the moving direction (for example, the left and right direction) of the third movable portion 840. , And an engaging portion 856c that is slidably engaged with the shaft 840c of the third movable portion 840. The first guide 856a includes a groove that extends in the moving direction (for example, the vertical direction) of the first movable portion 820, penetrates in the front-rear direction, and an engaging member that slidably engages with the groove. The front surface on the upper end side of the lower right support portion 853 is engaged with the engaging member of the first guide 856a. The second guide 856b includes a groove that extends in the moving direction (for example, the left-right direction) of the third movable portion 840, penetrates in the front-rear direction, and an engaging member that slidably engages with the groove. The engaging member of the second guide 856b is engaged with the front right end side on the upper end side of the upper middle support portion 854. As a result, when the third movable portion 840 moves, the upper right support portion 856 moves in the movement direction (for example, the left-right direction) of the third movable portion 840. Then, when the upper right support portion 856 moves, the lower right support portion 853 moves in the moving direction (for example, the left-right direction) of the third movable portion 840.

  The lower middle decorative portion 861 has a front surface formed in a predetermined shape and a rear surface fixed to the lower middle support portion 851. The lower left decorative portion 862 has a front surface formed in a predetermined shape and a rear surface fixed to the lower left support portion 852. The lower right decorative portion 863 has a front surface formed in a predetermined shape and a rear surface fixed to the lower right support portion 853. The upper middle decorative portion 864 has a front surface formed in a predetermined shape and a rear surface fixed to the upper middle support portion 854. The upper left decorative portion 865 has a front surface formed in a predetermined shape and a rear surface fixed to the upper left support portion 855. The upper right decorative portion 866 has a front surface formed in a predetermined shape and a rear surface fixed to the upper right support portion 856.

  The lower middle decorative portion 861, the lower left decorative portion 862, the lower right decorative portion 863, the upper middle decorative portion 864, the upper left decorative portion 865, and the upper right decorative portion 866 are formed in shapes related to each other. The upper middle decorative portion 864, the upper left decorative portion 865, and the upper right decorative portion 866 are integrated into one shape when they are close to or in contact with each other. Further, the lower middle decorative portion 861, the lower left decorative portion 862, and the lower right decorative portion 863 are integrated in a state where they are close to or in contact with each other to form one shape. In addition, the lower middle decorative portion 861, the lower left decorative portion 862, the lower right decorative portion 863, the upper middle decorative portion 864, the upper left decorative portion 865, and the upper right decorative portion 866 may be formed in a shape showing characters, for example. Good. In this case, the upper middle decorative part 864, the upper left decorative part 865, and the upper right decorative part 866 are formed in a shape indicating a character string representing one meaning, and the lower middle decorative part 861, the lower left decorative part 862, and the lower right decorative part are formed. The portion 863 may be formed in a shape indicating a character string representing one meaning, and both character strings may have a predetermined meaning.

  The drive unit 83 includes a first drive unit 870 that moves the first movable unit 820 and members attached to the first movable unit 820 in a predetermined direction (for example, the vertical direction), the second movable unit 830, and the second movable unit. A second drive unit 880 configured to move a member attached to the unit 830 in a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction (for example, the left-right direction).

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the first drive unit 870 uses a first motor 871 controlled by a sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 11), which will be described later, and the driving force of the first motor 871 of the movable unit 82. A first transmission portion 872 that transmits to the first movable portion 820. The first transmission portion 872 includes a first gear 872a that is rotated by a first motor 871, and a second gear 872b that engages with the rack portion 822 of the first gear 872a and the first movable portion 820. When the first motor 871 is driven by the control of the sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 11), the first movable unit 820 moves upward, for example, from the state shown in FIG. It will be in the state shown to b), and will be in the state shown in FIG.6 (c).

7 and 8 are rear views of the accessory device of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.
In FIG. 7, in the accessory device 8, the lower left support portion 852 and the lower right support portion 853 are close to or in contact with the lower middle support portion 851, and the lower middle support portion 851, the lower left support portion 852, and the lower right support portion 853 are placed. Are arranged in an integrated state, and the upper left support portion 855 and the upper right support portion 856 are close to or in contact with the upper middle support portion 854, and the upper middle support portion 854, the upper left support portion 855, and the upper right support portion 856 are It is arranged in an integrated state. 8, in the accessory device 8, the lower left support portion 852 and the lower right support portion 853 are separated from the lower middle support portion 851, and the lower middle support portion 851, the lower left support portion 852, and the lower right support portion 853 are separated. The upper left support portion 855 and the upper right support portion 856 are separated from the upper middle support portion 854, and the upper middle support portion 854, the upper left support portion 855 and the upper right support portion 856 are separated from each other. Has been.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the second drive unit 880 transmits the driving force of the second motor 881 and the second motor 881 controlled by the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 11) described later to the third movable unit 840. A second transmission unit 882. The second transmission portion 882 includes a link member 882a that is rotated by a second motor 881, and an arm member that has one end pivotally connected to the link member 882a and the other end pivotally connected to the third movable portion 840. 882b. From the state shown in FIG. 7, the accessory device 8 is driven by the second motor 881 under the control of the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 11), so that the link member 882a rotates in the direction of the arrow in FIG. The arm member 882b is pulled rightward, and accordingly, the third movable portion 840 is also pulled rightward. Then, the upper right support portion 856 that engages with the third movable portion 840 and the lower right support portion 853 that engages with the upper right support portion 856 are also pulled in the right direction. Further, when the third movable portion 840 is pulled in the right direction, the second movable portion 830 is pulled in the left direction. Then, the upper left support portion 855 that engages with the second movable portion 830 and the lower left support portion 852 that engages with the upper left support portion 855 are also pulled in the right direction. Thereby, the accessory apparatus 8 will be in the state shown in FIG.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the liquid crystal display device 11 is attached to the upper portion of the upper door 9 a of the front door 2 b so as to display, for example, an image relating to a game effect or information related to the game in a display area 11 a formed on the front side. It has been. The liquid crystal display device 11 can display game table information such as, for example, customization of gaming machines and gaming history, in addition to executing effects by displaying images. In addition, a hall menu is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 in accordance with the operation of the game hall manager. In this case, the liquid crystal display device 11 is configured by a touch panel, and buttons and the like that can be operated by the administrator can be displayed in the hall menu.

  The upper door 9a has a display window 4 that allows a part of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R to be visually recognized. The display window 4 includes three left display windows 4L, middle display windows 4C, and right display windows 4R corresponding to the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  These display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are provided at positions overlapping with the arrangement areas of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R when viewed from the front (player side), and in front of the three reels (player side) ). Therefore, the player can visually recognize the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the display window 4 through the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R.

  In the present embodiment, the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are arranged in succession among a plurality of types of symbols drawn on each reel when the rotation of the corresponding reel provided behind the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R is stopped. It is set to a size that can display two symbols. That is, in the frame of the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R, the upper, middle, and lower areas are provided for each reel, and one symbol is displayed in each area. In this embodiment, a line connecting the upper region of the left reel 3L, the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the lower region of the right reel 3R is defined as a winning determination line for determining whether or not a winning is made. That is, in this embodiment, the winning determination line is set as a so-called right-down crossdown.

  A protective glass 6 is provided on the front side of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the liquid crystal display device 11 described above. This prevents the player from touching the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the liquid crystal display device 11 directly.

  Further, the front panel 5 of the upper door 9a has a pair of upper specific decorative portions 5d disposed so as to sandwich the fixed decorative portion 5b at the upper portion thereof, and a lower specific decorative portion 5e disposed substantially at the lower portion thereof. And other decorative members. LED substrates 72 (see FIG. 9) are arranged on the back sides of the pair of upper specific decorative portions 5d and lower specific decorative portions 5e, respectively. The above-described fixed decorative portions 5a, 5b, 5c, the pair of upper specific decorative portions 5d and the lower specific decorative portion 5e are LEDs 25 on the LED board 72 arranged behind each other as the game progresses (see FIG. 9). When is turned on, an effect of emitting light is performed.

  A pedestal 12 is formed at the center of the lower door 9b. The pedestal portion 12 includes various devices (medal insertion slot 13, MAX bet button 14, 1 bet button 15, start lever 16, stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, selection buttons (push buttons) to be operated by the player. , Decision button, etc.) are provided.

  The medal slot 13 is provided for receiving a medal dropped on the pachislot machine 1 from the outside by the player. That is, the medal slot 13 is for a medal to be inserted by the player. The medals inserted from the medal slot 13 are used for one game with a preset number (for example, three) as the upper limit, and the amount exceeding the preset number is deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. (So-called credit function).

  The MAX bet button 14 and the 1 bet button 15 are provided to determine the number of cards used for one game from medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. Although not shown in FIG. 2, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a settlement button. This checkout button is provided to pull out (discharge) medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside.

  The start lever 16 is for starting the rotation of all the reels (3L, 3C, 3R) in accordance with the player's operation, and constitutes a start operation means.

  The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are provided in association with the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and are for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels according to the player's operation. . These stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R constitute stop operation means.

  The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are used when performing operations related to information displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. For example, when performing a selection operation on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 11. Used for. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

  The selection button and the determination button are used when performing various operations on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 11.

  The pedestal portion 12 is provided with a 7-segment display 28 made up of 7-segment LEDs. The 7-segment display 28 displays information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as the number of payouts), the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as the number of credits), and the like. Digital display. The 7-segment display 28 also has an instruction monitor (not shown) for instructing stop operation information necessary to display a combination of symbols according to the winning combination determined as an internal winning combination along the winning determination line. ) Is provided. The instruction monitor is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and lights up or flashes in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the instruction of the stop operation to be instructed, so that a so-called pushing order is provided as information on the stop operation necessary for the player. Instruct (inform).

  At the lower part of the lower door 9b, a medal payout port 21, a medal tray 22, speakers 23L, 23R and the like are provided. The medal payout port 21 guides medals discharged by driving a hopper device 43 described later to the outside. The medal tray 22 stores medals discharged from the medal payout opening 21. In addition, the speakers 23L and 23R output sound such as sound effects and music corresponding to the contents of the production.

<Electric configuration of pachislot machine>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachislot machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 41 arranged in the cabinet 2a and a sub control board 42 arranged in the front door 2b. The main control board 41 is electrically connected to the reel relay terminal board 51, the setting key switch 52, the cabinet side relay board 53, the door relay terminal board 54, and the power board 44 b of the power supply device 44. ing.

  The reel relay terminal plate 51 is disposed inside the reel body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal board 51 is electrically connected to stepping motors (not shown) of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays signals output from the main control board 41 to the stepping motors. The setting key type switch 52 is used when changing the setting of the pachislot machine 1 or when checking the setting of the pachislot machine 1.

  The cabinet-side relay board 53 is electrically connected to an external concentration terminal board 56, a hopper device 43, and a medal auxiliary storage switch 57. The cabinet-side relay board 53 relays signals output from the main control board 41 to the external concentration terminal board 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57. That is, the external concentration terminal board 56, the hopper device 43 and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57 are connected to the main control board 41 via the cabinet side relay board 53.

  The external concentration terminal board 56 is attached to the cabinet 2 a and is provided for outputting signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot machine 1.

  The medal auxiliary storage switch 57 passes through a medal auxiliary storage (not shown). The medal auxiliary storage switch 57 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage is full of medals.

  A power switch 44 a is connected to the power board 44 b of the power device 44. The power switch 44a is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachislot machine 1.

  The door relay terminal plate 54 includes a medal sensor 46, a door open / close monitoring switch 61, a BET switch 62, a settlement switch 63, a start switch 64, a stop switch board 65, a game operation display board 66, a selection switch 67, a decision switch 68, and a sub switch. A relay board 69 is connected. That is, the medal sensor 46, the door open / close monitoring switch 61, the BET switch 62, the checkout switch 63, the start switch 64, the stop switch board 65, the game operation display board 66, the selection switch 67, the decision switch 68, and the sub relay board 69 The relay terminal board 54 is connected to the main control board 41.

  The medal sensor 46 detects that a medal has passed through a selector (not shown) and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The door open / close monitoring switch 61 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening / closing of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachislot machine 1. The BET switch 62 detects that the MAX bet button 14 and the 1 bet button 15 (see FIG. 2) have been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41.

  The settlement switch 63 detects that a settlement button (not shown) has been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The start switch 64 detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation), and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41.

  The stop switch substrate 65 is a substrate constituting a circuit for stopping the rotating reel and a circuit for displaying the stopable reel by an LED or the like. The stop switch board 65 is provided with a stop switch. The stop switch detects that each stop button 17L, 17C, 17R has been pressed by the player (stop operation).

  The game operation display board 66 displays the number of inserted medals on the 7-segment display 28 when accepting insertion of medals, when the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotatable and when replaying. It is a substrate for making it. A 7-segment display 28 and an LED 70 are connected to the game operation display board 66. For example, the LED 70 lights a mark for displaying the start of a game, a mark for performing a replay, and the like.

  The selection switch 67 detects that the selection button has been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41 and the sub relay board 69. The decision switch 68 detects that the decision button has been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41 and the sub relay board 69.

  The sub relay board 69 relays the wiring connecting the sub control board 42 and the main control board 41. The sub-relay board 69 relays the wiring connecting the sub-control board 42 and a plurality of boards disposed around the sub-control board 42. That is, the sub-control board 42, the sound I / O board 71, the LED board 72, the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74, and the drive control board 78 are electrically connected to the sub-relay board 69.

  The sub control board 42 is connected to the main control board 41 through the door relay terminal board 54 and the sub relay board 69. The sub control board 42 is electrically connected to the sound I / O board 71, the LED board 72, the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74, and the drive control board 78 via the sub relay board 69. .

  The sound I / O board 71 outputs sound to the speakers 23L and 23R. The LED board 72 displays a blinking pattern by causing the LED group 25 showing a specific example of the light source to emit light according to the effect executed by the control of the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 11).

  The 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74 stores a history of opening / closing of the front door 2b. The 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74 outputs a signal for displaying an error on the liquid crystal display device 11 to the sub control board 42 (sub control circuit 101) when the front door 2b is opened.

  The drive control board 78 drives the solenoid 816, the first motor 871, and the second motor 881 of the accessory device 8 (see FIG. 5) according to the effects executed by the control of the sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 11). Let The accessory device 8 is driven and controlled by the drive control board 78, so that the decorative parts (the lower middle decorative part 861, the lower left decorative part 862, the lower right decorative part shown in FIG. 5) are arranged in a predetermined direction (for example, the vertical direction). 863, upper middle decorative portion 864, upper left decorative portion 865, and upper right decorative portion 866) are moved. Further, the accessory device 8 is driven and controlled by the drive control board 78 so that a part of the decorative part (the lower left decorative part 862 shown in FIG. The right decoration part 863, the upper left decoration part 865, and the upper right decoration part 866) are moved.

  A ROM cartridge substrate 76 and a liquid crystal relay substrate 77 are connected to the sub control substrate 42. The ROM cartridge substrate 76 is a substrate for managing image and video for production, sound, light (LED group 25), driving of the accessory device 8 (movement of the decoration part), and communication data. The liquid crystal relay substrate 77 is a substrate that relays the wiring connecting the sub control substrate 42 and the liquid crystal display device 11.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the main control circuit 91 constituted by the main control board 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the main control circuit 91 of the pachislot machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the main control circuit 91 as a control means includes a microcomputer 92 installed on the main control board 41 as a main component, and is also referred to as a game state or an effect state (hereinafter also referred to as “playing state”). ). The microcomputer 92 includes a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94, and a main RAM 95.

  The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (command signals) to the sub-control circuit 101 described later, and the like. The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by execution of the control program.

  The main CPU 93 is connected to a clock pulse generation circuit 96, a frequency divider 97, a random number generator 98, and a sampling circuit 99. The clock pulse generation circuit 96 and the frequency divider 97 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 93 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 98 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535, 0 to 255). The sampling circuit 99 extracts one value from the generated random numbers. The random number generator 98 generates, for example, random numbers from 0 to 65535 in order to extract an internal lottery random value and generates random numbers from 0 to 255 in order to extract an effect random number. As the random number generator, a plurality of random number generators for extracting the internal lottery random value and a plurality of random number generators for extracting the production random number may be provided individually.

  The main CPU 93 counts the number of times pulses are output to the stepping motors of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R after detecting the reel index. Thereby, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated).

  The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. This reel index is provided at a predetermined position of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, for example, with a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit by the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Detection is performed by a reel position detection unit (not shown) including a detection piece interposed therebetween.

  Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 16 times) necessary for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is incremented by one. The symbol counter is provided for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when a reel index is detected by a reel position detector (not shown).

  In other words, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum number of sliding symbols is basically set to 4 symbols. Therefore, when the left stop button 17L is pressed, the symbol of the left reel 3L in the middle of the display window 4 and each symbol within the range up to four symbols ahead can be stopped in the middle of the display window 4. It becomes a simple design.

<Sub control circuit>
Next, the sub control circuit 101 constituted by the sub control board 42 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the sub control circuit 101 of the pachislot machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the sub control circuit 101 as the sub control unit is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91, and the content of the presentation is determined and executed based on the command signal transmitted from the main control circuit 91. 9 and the peripheral devices such as the liquid crystal display device 11, the solenoid 816, the first motor 871, the second motor 881, the LED group 25, and the speakers 23L and 23R shown in FIG. The sub control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM 103, a rendering processor 104, a drawing RAM 105, and a driver 106.

  In response to the command signal transmitted from the main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 10), the sub CPU 102 performs sound and light output, display control of the liquid crystal display device 11, and control according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76. The driving of the accessory device 8 (see FIG. 5) is controlled. The ROM cartridge substrate 76 basically includes a program storage area and a data storage area.

  A control program executed by the sub CPU 102 is stored in the program storage area. For example, the control program includes a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 10). Further, the control program produces an effect based on a command signal transmitted from the main control circuit 91 (information such as a game state and a play state included in the command signal, an internal winning combination and a combination of displayed symbols). Production control tasks for controlling video display, accessory operation, lamp lighting, sound output, etc.) are included. The effect control task includes a drawing control task for controlling display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 2), a drive control task for controlling the movement of the decoration part of the accessory device 8 (see FIG. 5), and an LED group 25. A lamp control task for controlling the light output from the light source such as (see FIG. 9), a voice control task for controlling the sound output from the speakers 23L and 23R, and the like are included.

  The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, a storage area for storing animation data related to creation of a video, and the like. Also included are a storage area for storing sound data related to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data related to the light on / off pattern, and the like.

  The sub RAM 103 stores a storage area for registering effect data according to the determined effect, a game state and a play state included in a command signal transmitted from the main control circuit 91, an internal winning combination, and a combination of displayed symbols A storage area for storing various data such as is provided.

  The sub CPU 102, the rendering processor 104, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create a video according to the animation data designated according to the determined presentation, and display the created video on the liquid crystal display device 11. Let Further, the sub CPU 102 moves the accessory part 8 (see FIG. 5) decoration portion according to the accessory apparatus movement pattern data designated in accordance with the determined effect.

  Further, the sub CPU 102 causes the speakers 23L and 23R to output a sound such as BGM according to the sound data designated in accordance with the determined effect. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls lighting and extinguishing of the LED group 25 in accordance with lamp data designated in accordance with the determined effect.

[Drive control]
The sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 11), which is an example of the drive control means, determines the effect based on the command signal transmitted from the main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 10), and the role designated according to the effect. Based on the object device movement pattern data, the driving of the solenoid 816, the first motor 871, and the second motor 881 of the accessory device 8 is controlled. The sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 11) is a three-stage decoration part (lower middle decoration part 861, lower left decoration part 862, lower right decoration part 863, upper middle decoration part shown in FIG. 5) in the accessory device 8. 864, the upper left decoration part 865 and the upper right decoration part 866) are controlled to move.

  12 to 15 are diagrams for explaining the operation of the accessory device of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 12 shows an initial state of the accessory device 8. FIG. 13 shows a state where the accessory device 8 has moved one stage. FIG. 14 shows a state where the accessory device 8 has been moved in two stages. FIG. 15 shows a state in which the accessory device 8 has been moved in three stages.

  As shown in FIG. 12, in the initial state, the accessory device 8 has the first movable portion 820 disposed at the uppermost end position, and the second movable portion 830 and the third movable portion 840 disposed at positions closest to each other. ing. Accordingly, the lower middle decorative portion 861, the lower left decorative portion 862, and the lower right decorative portion 863 shown in FIG. 5 are arranged close to or in contact with each other, and the upper middle decorative portion 864 and the upper left decorative portion 864 are arranged in an integrated state. The decorative part 865 and the upper right decorative part 866 are also arranged close to or in contact with each other. The lower middle decorative portion 861, the lower left decorative portion 862, and the lower right decorative portion 863 in an integrated state are behind the upper middle decorative portion 864, the upper left decorative portion 865, and the upper right decorative portion 866 in an integrated state. Is arranged. In addition, the upper middle decorative portion 864, the upper left decorative portion 865, and the upper right decorative portion 866 in an integrated state are disposed behind the fixed decorative portion 5b (see FIG. 4). That is, the lower middle decorative part 861, the lower left decorative part 862, the lower right decorative part 863, the upper middle decorative part 864, the upper left decorative part 865, and the upper right decorative part 866 are in a state that the player cannot visually recognize in the initial state. Has been placed.

  The sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 11) controls the solenoid 816 to bring the stopper 815 into the non-locking state based on the accessory device movement pattern data in the first stage production of the accessory device 8, so that the first motor 871 is driven to move the first movable portion 820 downward, the stopper 815 is locked, and when the second protrusion 823B of the first movable portion 820 contacts the stopper 815, the first motor 871 is stopped. . Accordingly, the lower middle support portion 851, the lower left support portion 852, the lower right support portion 853, the upper middle support portion 854, the upper left support portion 855, and the upper right support portion 856 shown in FIG. 5 together with the first movable portion 820. Move down. And the accessory apparatus 8 will be in the state shown in FIG.

  16 to 18 are diagrams for explaining the effects of the accessory device of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. 16 to 18 are views of the accessory device 8 viewed from the front. FIG. 16 shows a state where the accessory device 8 has moved one stage. FIG. 17 shows a state where the accessory device 8 has been moved in two stages. FIG. 18 shows a state where the accessory device 8 has been moved in three stages. By the movement of the first stage, the accessory device 8 moves behind the upper middle decorative portion 864, the upper left decorative portion 865, and the upper right decorative portion 866 in an integrated state, and the lower middle decorative portion 861 ( 5), the lower left decorative portion 862 (see FIG. 5) and the lower right decorative portion 863 (see FIG. 5) are arranged, these protrude from the back of the fixed decorative portion 5b, and the state shown in FIG. Become. That is, by the movement of the first stage, the upper middle decorative portion 864, the upper left decorative portion 865, and the upper right decorative portion 866 in an integrated state can be visually recognized by the player.

  Next, the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 11) controls the solenoid 816 based on the accessory device movement pattern data and stops the stopper 815 in the second stage effect of the accessory device 8, as shown in FIG. In the non-locking state, the first motor 871 is driven to move the first movable portion 820 downward, and when the first movable portion 820 moves to the lowermost position, the first motor 871 is stopped. Accordingly, the lower middle support portion 851, the lower left support portion 852, and the lower right support portion 853 shown in FIG. 5 together with the first movable portion 820, the upper middle support portion 854, the upper left support portion 855, and the upper right support portion 856. Move down.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the accessory device 8 moves in a second stage so that the lower middle decorative portion 861, the lower left decorative portion 862 and the lower right decorative portion 863 are in an integrated state. It protrudes from behind the middle decorative portion 864, the upper left decorative portion 865, and the upper right decorative portion 866. That is, by the second stage movement, the lower middle decorative portion 861, the lower left decorative portion 862 and the lower right decorative portion 863 in an integrated state, the upper middle decorative portion 864, the upper left decorative portion 865 in an integrated state, and The player can visually recognize the upper right decoration portion 866.

  Next, the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 11) drives the second motor 881 based on the accessory device movement pattern data as shown in FIG. The third movable part 840 is moved away from the second movable part 830. As a result, the second movable portion 830 also moves away from the third movable portion 840, the lower left support portion 852 and the lower right support portion 853 move away from the lower middle support portion 851, and the upper left support portion 855. Then, the upper right support portion 856 moves in a direction away from the upper middle support portion 854.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the accessory device 8 moves in a direction in which the lower left decorative part 862 and the lower right decorative part 863 are separated from the lower middle decorative part 861 by the third stage movement, and the upper left decorative part is moved. 865 and the upper right decoration part 866 move in directions away from the upper middle decoration part 864, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in the effect device 8, a part of the plurality of decorative parts (upper middle decorative part 864, upper left decorative part 865, and upper right decorative part 866) are displayed on the front panel in the first stage effect. An integral shape that is continuous with the shape of a part (fixed decorative portion 5b) is formed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 17, the accessory device 8 has other parts of the plurality of decorative parts (the lower middle decorative part 861, the lower left decorative part 862, and the lower right decorative part 863) in the second stage effect. Are formed in an integrated shape that is continuous with the above-mentioned part of the plurality of decoration parts (upper middle decoration part 864, upper left decoration part 865, and upper right decoration part 866). An integral shape that is continuous with the shape of a part (the fixed decorative portion 5b) is formed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the accessory device 8 forms an integrated shape that is continuous with the shape of a part of the front panel (fixed decorative portion 5 b) in a plurality of decorative parts in the third stage effect. In addition, the shape formed by connecting opposite sides of a plurality of decorative parts is connected to the shape of a part of the front panel (a pair of upper specific decorative portion 5d and lower specific decorative portion 5e), thereby providing a predetermined A shape (in the example shown in FIG. 18, a V shape) is formed. At this time, the pair of upper specific decorative portions 5d and lower specific decorative portions 5e emit light. Also, the lower left decorative portion 862 and the lower right decorative portion 863 have moved away from the lower middle decorative portion 861, and the upper left decorative portion 865 and the upper right decorative portion 866 have moved away from the upper middle decorative portion 864. Thus, from the gap between the lower left decorative part 862 and the lower right decorative part 863 and the lower middle decorative part 861, and the upper left decorative part 865 and the gap between the upper right decorative part 866 and the upper middle decorative part 864, The display area 11a is visible to the player, and a predetermined display (for example, a display having the same color as the emission color of the pair of upper specific decoration part 5d and lower specific decoration part 5e) is displayed on the display area 11a. Thereby, a predetermined shape (in the example shown in FIG. 18, a V shape) is formed by the light emission of the pair of upper specific decorative portion 5d and the lower specific decorative portion 5e and the predetermined display in the display region 11a.

  In the example shown in FIG. 18, nothing is displayed between the lower middle decorative portion 861, the lower left decorative portion 862, the lower right decorative portion 863, and the lower specific decorative portion 5e. A liquid crystal display device is provided, and a lower left decorative region 862 and a predetermined display in the display region 11a visible from the gap between the lower right decorative region 863 and the lower middle decorative region 861 are displayed on the display region of the transparent liquid crystal display device. An image with high transparency connected to the specific decorative portion 5e may be displayed. As a result, light emission of the pair of upper specific decorative portions 5d, predetermined display in the display region 11a, an image in the display region of the transparent liquid crystal display device, and the lower specific decorative portion 5e are integrated (for example, a V shape) ) Can be produced.

<Pachislot machine gaming state and game appearance>
Next, with reference to FIG.19 and FIG.20, the game state and the game state which are performed in the pachi-slot machine 1 are demonstrated.

<Game state>
With reference to FIG. 19, the flow of the gaming state controlled by the main CPU 93 will be described.

  As game states of the present embodiment, RT0, RT1, RT2, BB inside (RT3), BB1 (RT4), and BB2 (RT5) are provided. In addition, MB is provided as a gaming state that operates in RT0-2. RT0, RT1, and RT2 are collectively referred to as a general gaming state or in general. BB1 (RT4), BB2 (RT5), and MB are collectively referred to as a special gaming state or bonus. There are MBs in MB1 and MB2, but FIG. 19 collectively shows MBs. BB inside (RT3) is a state in which BB1 or BB2 is determined as an internal winning combination and the winning is permitted, and is also referred to as a carry-over state as will be described later.

  Before describing the gaming state, the combination provided in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 28 and FIG. 29, a role that can be determined as an internal winning combination (winning combination) is a re-playing combination (No. 1 to 15 in non-MB and MB: replay, also referred to as lip for short), Bell (No. 16 to 43 in non-MB), Watermelon (No. 44, 49 in non-MB), Cherry (No. 45, 46, 50, 51 in non-MB: also called Che for short), MB1 (No. 47 in non-MB), MB2 (No. 48 in non-MB), BB1 (No. 49 to 51 in non-MB), and BB2 (No. 52 in non-MB) are provided. Replay, bell, watermelon, cherry, MB1, MB2, BB1, and BB2 are collectively referred to as a winning combination. Among the winning roles, the bell, watermelon, and cherry are the ones that have paid out medals at the time of winning, and are collectively called small roles. There are two types of bells: a batting order bell (also referred to as a pushing order bell) that may be won if it is correctly answered in the so-called pushing order, but may not be awarded if it is not correctly answered in the pushing order, and a common bell that does not require pushing order. Watermelon and cherry are also called rare roles. MB1, MB2, BB1, and BB2 are collectively called special roles. BB1 and BB2 are also called carryovers. The replay is provided with a transition role that triggers the transition between RTs. The replay that becomes a transition role includes a transition role such as RT2 transition lip that triggers transition from RT1 to RT2, and a transition role such as RT0 transition lip that triggers transition from RT1 and RT2 to RT0. Also, WSP lip and SP lip of group roles that trigger the transition to ART described later (display mode of red symbols “bar 1” and “bar 2” included in the symbol combination when display is established according to a predetermined stop operation order) From the above, there is also an ART transition combination such as a combination in which a replay relating to a red bar W and a red bar S described later can be established. Furthermore, replay also has a maintenance role to maintain RT without shifting between RTs. The replays that serve as a maintenance role include an RT0 middle lip that maintains RT0 (also referred to as an RT0 normal lip or RT0 maintenance lip) and an RT2 maintenance lip that maintains RT2. The transition condition from RT0, RT2 to RT1 includes a bell spillage that is established when a so-called batting order bell is missed. The gaming state shifts when these roles are won or when winning, or when a bell spill is established. In the MB, all small combinations (bell, watermelon, cherry) are determined as internal winning combinations.

  Regarding RT0 to RT2, RT0 is a gaming state with the lowest winning probability (replay winning probability) of the re-player, RT1 is a gaming state having a higher replay winning probability than RT0, and RT2 is replayed more than RT1. A gaming state with a high winning probability. RT2 may operate together with AT (assist time), in which case it operates as a so-called ART. RT0, RT1, and RT2 are collectively called general. RT0 shifts to RT1 when the hitting order (pushing order) of a stop operation, which will be described later, fails and the bell spilling is established. In RT1, when the correct answer is made in the stop operation stroke order (push order) and the RT2 transition lip wins, the process shifts to RT2, while when the stop operation strike order (push order) fails and the RT0 transition lip wins, the process shifts to RT0. To do. In RT2, if the stop operation stroke order (push order) fails and a bell spill is established, the process proceeds to RT1, while if the stop operation stroke order (push order) fails and the RT0 transition lip is won, the process proceeds to RT0. To do.

  In general, such as RT0, RT1, and RT2, when BB1 and BB2 are determined as internal winning combinations, the process proceeds to BB internal (RT3). During BB, BB1 and BB2 are carried over as internal winning combinations, and the symbol combinations corresponding to BB1 and BB2 are stopped and displayed along the winning determination line according to the timing of the stop operation on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. This is a so-called carry-over state that allows this. During BB, the replay winning probability is approximately the same as RT0. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 and BB2 corresponding to the internal winning combination is stopped and displayed along the winning determination line in the inside of BB, BB winning occurs and BB1 (RT4) and BB2 (RT5) are activated. The operations of BB1 (RT4) and BB2 (RT5) are terminated on condition that, for example, more than 351 medals are paid out. When the operation of BB1 (RT4) and BB2 (RT5) ends, the process proceeds to RT0.

  When BB1 and BB2 are determined as internal winning combinations, corresponding data is set in the carryover combination storing area of the main RAM 95. The data set in the carryover combination storage area is maintained until the corresponding BB1, BB2 wins, and when the BB1, BB2 wins, the data in the carryover combination storage area is cleared. Whether or not BB1 and BB2 are in a carryover state can be determined according to whether data is set in the carryover combination storage area. On the other hand, for other re-games and small roles, MB1 and MB2, when determined as internal winning combinations, the corresponding data is set in the internal winning combination storage area of the main RAM 95, and one game (unit game) is played. Every time the process ends, the data in the internal winning combination storage area is cleared. When a combination of symbols corresponding to each combination is displayed, the corresponding data is set in the display combination storage area of the main RAM 95, and the data in the display combination storage area is updated every time one game (unit game) is completed. Cleared.

  In addition, in general, such as RT0, RT1, RT2, MB1 and MB2 are determined as internal winning combinations, and when the symbol combination corresponding to these MB1 and MB2 is stopped and displayed along the winning determination line, MB winning is achieved. While maintaining RT0-2 at the time of MB winning, it is in MB (without RT transition). For example, when MB is won during RT0 and MB is entered, it becomes RT0 in MB, and when RT0 in MB is completed, it returns to RT0 in non-MB. The case of MB winning during RT1 and RT2 is the same as the case of MB winning during RT0. Also, during MB1 due to MB1 winning, for example, the operation ends on condition that more than nine medals are paid out. During MB2 due to MB2 winning, for example, the operation ends on condition that more than 36 medals are paid out.

<Out of play>
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the flow of the ball-out state controlled by the main CPU 93 will be described.

  The appearance state of the present embodiment means a state in which the average acquired number of medals in the section is controlled to increase / decrease depending on the section where the navigation instruction is performed by the instruction monitor and the section where the navigation instruction is not performed. As for the appearance of the ball, it can be roughly divided into normal state (normal, normal section), chance zone (CZ, EXCZ, standby section), ART (advantageous section), normal BB that operates in conjunction with BB1, BB2, and special BB. In preparation for ART before the transition to ART (advantageous section) is provided. In the following description, a state controlled by the main CPU 93 is particularly referred to as “out-going state”, and a state controlled by the sub CPU 102 is referred to as “effect state”. Basically, the appearance state and the production state match, but there are cases where they do not match. This will be described later.

  The normal state is a ball-out state where no navigation instruction is given by the instruction monitor, and the process shifts to CZ or EXCZ based on a winning result of CZ lottery described later. In the normal state, ISM points to be described later are obtained, and CZ lottery is performed using these ISM points. In the normal state, an ART lottery which will be described later may be performed under a specific condition, and the state may be shifted to ART based on the winning result of the ART lottery. Further, in the normal state, effects such as CZ precursor, ART precursor, and non-ART precursor described later may be executed. In the normal state, a navigation instruction may be given by an instruction monitor. In this case, it is preferable that the navigation instruction is performed with a lower probability than in the case of ART described later.

  The chance zone is a ball-out state where no navigation instruction is given by the instruction monitor, and there are normal CZ (simply referred to as “CZ”) and EXCZ.

  CZ is a ball-out state in which a navigation instruction is not made to shift from the normal state during RT0 or RT1 based on the CZ lottery winning result, and continues for a predetermined 14 games (14G), for example. Until the 13th game, the CZ defeats the enemy character to acquire technique points to be described later, and an effect is displayed in which a meter display corresponding to the cumulative number (acquired number) of these technique points is performed, and the final game (14G In step (9), an effect such as defeating a boss character is performed based on the winning result of the ART lottery to be described later, thereby shifting to ART (ARTLv2) through ART preparation (not shown). In CZ, a navigation instruction may be performed by an instruction monitor. In this case, it is preferable that the navigation instruction is performed with a lower probability than in the case of ART described later.

  The EXCZ is a ball-out state in which a navigation instruction is made to shift from the normal state during RT2 based on the winning result of the CZ lottery, and is determined in advance except when shifting to ART in accordance with the winning of an ART transitioning role described later. For example, it continues for at least 10 games (10G). In EXCZ, when an ART transition combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a cut-in display that suggests that a symbol combination corresponding to the ART transition combination is stopped by so-called reverse pressing is performed. There is a possibility that EXCZ will continue for 11 games or more based on the winning result of the game number addition lottery described later, and the game shifts to ART according to the winning of the ART migrant before the number of games assigned is exhausted. In EXCZ, when the SP lip is won as an ART transition role, the process shifts to ARTLv4, which will be described later. On the other hand, when the WSP lip is won as an ART transition role, the process shifts to ARTLv5 via a special preparation and PTR, which will be described later. In EXCZ, the navigation instruction by the instruction monitor may be performed stochastically by, for example, lottery. In this case, it is preferable that the navigation instruction is performed with a lower probability than in the case of ART described later.

  ART is a ball-out state where navigation instructions are given by an instruction monitor. As an example, ARTLv1, ARTLv2, ARTLv3, ARTLv4, special preparation, PTR1 to PTR1-3 as additional specialization zones, and the main body of ART It is divided into a state such as ARTLv5 as a zone and RUSH as an additional specialization zone.

  ARTLv1, ARTLv2, ARTLv3, and ARTLv4 are in a state where effects such as promotion and demotion are performed step by step, and for example, 20 games (20G) are assigned as the number of each game. Basically, in ARTLv1, if a winning result is obtained by level-up lottery described later, it will be promoted to ARTLv2 after digesting 20 games, and if a result of losing is obtained by level-up lottery, it will be demoted after digesting 20 games. Transition to the state. In ARTLv2, if a winning result is obtained by level-up lottery, the game is promoted to ARTLv3 after digesting 20 games, and if a lose result is obtained by level-up lottery, it is demoted to ARTLv1 after digesting 20 games. In ARTLv3, if a winning result is obtained by level-up lottery, the game is promoted to ARTLv4 after digesting 20 games, and if a result of losing is obtained by level-up lottery, it is demoted to ARTLv2 after digesting 20 games. In ARTLv4, if a winning result is obtained by level-up lottery, it will be promoted after completing 20 games, and will shift to special preparation. If a result of losing is obtained by level-up lottery, it will be demoted to ARTLv3 after 20 games. . When shifting from CZ (usually CZ) to ART, transfer to ARTLv2 as the initial transfer destination. When shifting from EXCZ to ART, there are a case of shifting to ARTLv4 as an initial transfer destination and a case of shifting to special preparation depending on the winning type of the ART transfer combination. The determination and execution itself of the production contents are performed by the sub CPU 102. Further, when shifting from EXCZ to ART, it is desirable to start from a level of ARTLv3 or higher, which is more advantageous than ARTLv2, which is the initial transfer destination when shifting from CZ to ART. In ARTLv1, ARTLv2, and ARTLv3, two or more winning results may be obtained by level-up lottery. In this case, two or more promotions are internally committed from the current level. In addition, as an exceptional effect in ARTLv1, ARTLv2, ARTLv3, and ARTLv4, there is a case where an effect of content that is promoted after being demoted once is displayed. Such effects may be executed without fail, or may be executed according to predetermined conditions (for example, refer to parameters such as grades described later).

  Specialization preparation is a state in which an effect for determining PTR1 to PTR1 of an additional specialization zone to be described later is performed. For example, 3 games (3G) are allocated. If 3 games are digested in specialization preparation, it will transfer to either PTR1-3. PTR1 to 3 are states for determining the initial number of games of ARTLv5. For example, PTR1 is executed over 5 games (5G), PTR2 is executed over 6 games (6G ~), and PTR3 is executed over 15 games (15G ~) Is done. In the PTRs 1 to 3, the number of games of ARTLv5 is added according to the winning result of the extra game number lottery described later. PTR1 shifts to ARTLv5 when 5 games are digested. When PTR2 wins the bell after the replay winning count reaches 5 or more, the PTR2 shifts to ARTLv5. When PTR3 wins the ART transition combination within 15 games, the number of games is extended by allocating 15 games again, and when the number of games given without the ART transition combination is exhausted, it shifts to ARTLv5.

  ARTLv5 is a state that continues for the number of games added in PTR1 to 3 or RUSH described later. When ARTLv5 finishes after consuming the number of games, it returns to ARTLv4. Note that when ARTLv5 has used up the number of games, it may return to the normal state, for example, as the end of ART. Even in such ARTLv5, there is a possibility that the number of games may be added according to the winning result of the extra game number lottery. Further, in ARTLv5, when a winning result is obtained by an additional special stock lottery described later, the process proceeds to RUSH. RUSH is a state where an effect is added to increase the number of games of ARTLv5. For example, 3 games (3G) are set as one set, and the number of games is assigned in units of sets. In RUSH, the number of games of ARTLv5 is added according to the winning game number lottery result. When the number of games for the set is digested in RUSH, the process shifts to ARTLv5.

  The normal BB is a ball-out state that operates in conjunction with BB1 (RT4), and the special BB is a ball-out state that operates in conjunction with BB2 (RT5). The normal BB shifts to the normal state or chance zone (CZ) according to the end of BB1 (RT4), and may shift to ARTLv2 or ARTLv5 via ART preparation when winning the ART transfer role. . For example, if the SP lip is won as an ART transition during the normal BB, the BB1 (RT4) will be transferred to ARTLv2 via the ART preparation, while the BB1 (RT4) is completed. (RT4) After completing the process, the process proceeds to ARTLv5 via ART preparation. When the special BB ends in response to the end of BB2 (RT5), the special BB shifts to ART preparation. In the normal BB and the special BB, the average number of acquired medals is 240, for example. Such normal BB and special BB operate according to the winning of BB1 or BB2 through the normal state, the chance zone, the inside of BB by winning of BB1 or BB2 in ART. During ART preparation, when the game state is not staying at RT2 during the transition to ART, it is in a state of waiting for the start of ART until the transition to the RT2, and when transitioning from CZ to ARTLv2, it is normal for BB to ARTLv2 or ARTLv5 This function is activated when shifting to special state BB or ARTLv5. For example, when shifting to ART according to the SP lip winning after completion of the normal BB, the ART preparation is activated until the transition to RT2, and when the ART preparation is completed (shifting to RT2), the transition is made to ARTLv2. In addition, when transitioning to ART according to WSP Lip winning after normal BB ends, ART preparation is activated until transition to RT2, and when the ART preparation is complete (transition to RT2), it goes through special preparation Then, it shifts to ARTLv5. After completion of the special BB, the ART preparation is always activated, and when the ART preparation is completed, the process proceeds to the ARTLv5 via the special preparation. In the present embodiment, the transition to PTR is determined according to the winning of BB2. Therefore, in the special preparation for transferring from the special BB via the ART preparation, the PTR 1 to 3 of the next game of the game won by the RT 2 transfer lip described later are not dependent on the three assigned games. Move to one. In addition, when moving from EXCZ to ART, since RT2 is basically maintained, it is directly transferred to ART without going through ART preparation.

  In addition to ART winning lottery (ART winning), ART transfer role (SP Lip, WSP Lip) winning, BB2 winning (excluding BB1 winning), middle stage in MB If there is a cherry win and the ART transition condition is met according to the appearance of the ball, the transition to the ART is made.

<Design array table>
Next, the arrangement of symbols drawn on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the symbol arrangement table represents symbol numbers of a plurality of symbols arranged on the peripheral surfaces of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbol arrangement table shows the correspondence between 21 symbol numbers “0” to “20” and symbols corresponding to these symbol numbers.

  The symbol numbers “0” to “20” are used to specify the positions of symbols along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to the symbol numbers “0” to “20” are specified using the reel index and the symbol counter values. For example, the main CPU 93 manages the number of symbols rotated by referring to the value of the symbol counter after the reel index is detected, and the symbol positions of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are as follows: Detection is based on the position at which the reel index is detected. For example, in the present embodiment, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R rotate in a direction in which a plurality of symbols move from top to bottom within the display window 4. As a result, the player visually observes that a plurality of symbols pass through the middle of the display window 4 in the order of increasing symbol numbers (in the order of symbol number “0” next to symbol number “20”). Can do. When the symbol positioned at the middle stage of the display window 4 when the reel index is detected (the symbol passing through the middle stage of the display window 4) is the symbol number “0”, the symbol after the reel index is detected. Based on the value of the counter, it is specified how many symbols with the symbol number “0” larger than that of the symbol number “0” is located in the middle of the display window 4 (whether it is passing). The position of the symbol corresponding to the remaining symbol number is also specified.

  In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the winning determination line is set to one line as a so-called right-down crossdown, and the symbol combinations shown in the symbol combination table described later are stopped and displayed along the winning determination line. Then, a predetermined privilege is granted.

<Design code table>
Next, the symbol code will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the symbol code table represents the correspondence between symbols and codes arranged on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. As shown in the figure, the symbols used in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment are “Bar 1”, “Bar 2”, “White 7”, “B Bar”, “Lip”, “Bell 1”, “Bell There are 10 types: “2”, “Bell 3”, “Watermelon”, “Cherry”. “Bar 1” and “Bar 2” are collectively referred to as red bars or symbols unless otherwise distinguished. “Bell 1”, “Bell 2”, and “Bell 3” are collectively called bells unless otherwise distinguished.

<Design combination table>
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 23 is a symbol combination table relating to a special combination (BB1, BB2, MB1, MB2), FIG. 24 is a symbol combination table relating to a replaying combination (replay), and FIGS. 25 and 26 are small combinations (watermelon, special combination). FIG. 27 shows a symbol combination table related to the transition.

  The symbol combination table is used when determining whether or not the displayed symbol combination corresponds to a combination or a transition, and a symbol combination (combination) predetermined according to the type of privilege and a symbol combination Defines the correspondence between the privilege (the number of medals to be paid out) when the symbol is displayed and the data stored in the main RAM 95 when the symbol combination is stopped (established). 23 to 27, the data stored in the main RAM 95 is not shown.

  In this embodiment, when the symbol combination displayed along the winning determination line matches the symbol combination (combination) defined in the symbol combination table, it is determined that the winning or transition (bell spilling) display is established. . When it is determined that the prize is won, the player is given privileges such as paying out medals, operation of replay (replay), operation of a bonus game (a combination continuous action device). Further, when it is determined that the display of the bell-spilled eyes is established as the transition, the gaming state is shifted from RT0 or RT2 to RT1. When the symbol combination stopped and displayed along the winning determination line does not match the symbol combination related to the special combination, re-playing combination, and small combination specified in the symbol combination table, it is a so-called “losing”. When the symbol combination relating to the bell spilling as a transition is displayed, it is “lost”. It should be noted that in the symbol combination table, all “lost” symbol combinations may be provided, and “lost” may be specified by directly referring to the symbol combination table.

  The combination defined in the symbol combination table means a symbol combination of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R that is stopped and displayed along the winning determination line when each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped. In each combination name, a name corresponding to the type and role of the symbols constituting the symbol combination is defined.

  The number of payouts defined in the symbol combination table defines the number of medals to be paid out when the corresponding symbol combination (combination) is stopped and displayed. For example, referring to FIG. 25, when the symbol combination related to the combination name “C_XD watermelon_01” is stopped and displayed, four medals are paid out. In the present embodiment, the number of medals required for one game (specified number) is set to three.

  In this embodiment, as an attribute (abbreviation), the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is BB1, BB2, MB1, MB2A, MB2B, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-playing combination is REP1 to 10, and the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination Are NML1 to 36, and the symbol combination that becomes the RT1 transition trigger (transition) is defined as HZR1 to 3. BB1 is also referred to as white BB. BB2 is also referred to as black BB. MB1 is also called normal MB. MB2A and MB2B are also referred to as chance MB1 and chance MB2, respectively. Among REP1 to REP1, REP1 is RT0 middle REP, REP2 is RT0 transition lip, REP3 is RT2 transition lip, REP4 and 5 are RT2 maintenance lip, REP6 to 10 are collectively called red lip, REP6 , 8 and 9 are also called red bar S lip, REP7 is also called red bar W lip, and REP10 is also called reddish lip. Among NML 1 to 36, NML 1 to 3 are also called watermelons, NML 4, 5 and 6 are also called cherry, and NML 7 to 36 are also called bells. In particular, NML7 to 35 are also called batting order bells, and NML36 is also called a common bell. HZR1 to 3 are also called bell spilled eyes.

  Such attributes are roughly classified into a special combination (BB, MB), a re-playing combination (REP), a small combination (NML), and a transition (HZR) for a plurality of combinations of symbols, and the symbols along the winning determination line. Are grouped into groups that can be identified so that the combinations differ depending on the combination of roles and transitions. For example, “MB1” is an attribute that collectively refers to “C_normal MB — 01 to 18”, and each of the symbols along the winning determination line in the two columns of the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C is an arbitrary “bell 1”. “3” indicates an attribute of a symbol combination in which the symbol corresponding to one column of the right reel 3R is “watermelon” or “cherry”. “REP1” is an attribute that collectively refers to “C_RT0 Lip 1_01 to 06”, and the symbols corresponding to the two columns of the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C are arbitrarily assigned to “Bell 1-3” and “Rip”. On the other hand, the attribute of the symbol combination in which the symbol corresponding to one column of the right reel 3R is “watermelon” or “cherry” is shown. “REP4” is an attribute that collectively refers to “C_XU Lip — 01 to 10”, and the symbols corresponding to the two columns of the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C are “white 7”, “watermelon”, and “lip”. On the other hand, the attribute of the symbol combination in which the symbol corresponding to one column of the right reel 3R is “bar 2”, “white 7”, “bell 1”, “bell 3”, or “cherry” is shown. “REP6” is an attribute that collectively refers to “C_SP red lip — 01 to 08”, and each symbol corresponding to the two rows of the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R is “bar 1” or any “bell 1 to 3”. ”And“ Bell 2 ”, the symbol combination attribute is“ Bar 1 ”or“ Rip ”corresponding to one column of the left reel 3L. “NML1” is an attribute that collectively refers to “C_XD watermelon — 01, 02”, and the symbols corresponding to the two rows of the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R are both “watermelon” and the left reel 3L. The attribute of the symbol combination in which the symbol corresponding to one column is “white 7” or “watermelon” is shown. “HZR1” is an attribute that collectively refers to “R_transition 1_01 to 09”, and the symbols corresponding to the two columns of the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C are arbitrary “bells 1 to 3” and “cherry”. On the other hand, the attribute of the symbol combination in which the symbols corresponding to one column of the right reel 3R are arbitrary “bells 1 to 3” is shown. In the present embodiment, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 26, “weak cherries” (only in MB), “strong cherries”, “middle cherries” are shown as the outcome of suggesting the possibility of winning the bonus or winning the bonus. ”Can appear. In the case of “middle cherries”, the bonus is confirmed, and in the case of “weak cherries” (only during MB) or “strong cherries”, the possibility of winning the bonus is suggested. If the stop operation is performed at such a timing that the symbol related to the cherry on the left reel 3L is stopped at the middle or lower level, the symbol combination corresponding to “weak cherry”, “strong cherry”, or “middle cherry” is displayed. Whether or not the bonus is won can be easily determined according to whether or not. Furthermore, even if the bonus is not won and it is a win other than the cherry, the game can be advanced without missing a small role as much as possible. Such a hitting operation for stopping the cherry pattern is called “DDT”.

<Internal lottery table>
Next, the internal lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 28 shows an internal lottery table that is referred to during non-MB in setting 1, and FIG. 29 illustrates an internal lottery table referenced during MB in setting 1. The internal lottery table is provided so as to be different depending on whether or not it is in the MB for each setting, but the illustration of the other internal lottery tables other than those shown in FIG.

  The internal lottery table is used when an internal winning combination is determined by lottery for each gaming state, and defines lottery values corresponding to the respective combinations. In the present embodiment, the internal lottery table sequentially subtracts random numbers for lottery extracted from a predetermined random number range “0 to 65535” by lottery values corresponding to each combination, and the result of the subtraction becomes negative. It is used to determine an internal winning combination by determining whether or not (so-called “digit”) has occurred. In other words, the larger the numerical value specified as the lottery value in the internal lottery table, the higher the probability that the combination for which the lottery value is specified is determined as the internal winning combination. Thereby, the winning probability of the combination corresponding to each number is represented by “the lottery value corresponding to each number / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (65536)”. In FIG. 28, the lottery value itself is not defined for the role (for example, “BB2” etc.) that is not subject to lottery depending on the gaming state (inside BB, BB1, BB2), and the lottery value column. Indicates “−”.

  As shown in FIG. 28, according to the internal lottery table referred to during non-MB, the replay type and the winning probability determined as the internal winning combination change according to the RT type. Comparing the lottery values of the entire replays at RT0 to 2 in the non-MB, it can be seen that the replay types and winning probabilities determined as internal winning combinations in the respective gaming states are different. Focusing only on the replay, No. in RT0 in non-MB. No. 1 “F_RT0 in Lip” can be determined as an internal winning combination. Only 2 to 7 “F_RT2 transition lips 1 to 6” may be determined as internal winning combinations. Only 8 to 15 “Rips 1 to 3 in F_RT2”, “WS Lips 1 and 2 in F_RT2”, “SS Lips 1 and 2 in F_RT2”, “SF Lip in F_RT2” can be determined as internal winning combinations. is there.

  In RT3 inside the BB, the replay winning probability is substantially equal to RT0. Only one “F_RT0 middle lip” may be determined as an internal winning combination, and “BB1” and “F_watermelon”, “F_strong cherry” and “F_middle cherry” are duplicated wins, “BB2”, “ The single winning of “F_MB1” and “F_MB2” is lost. Looking at the winning probability of small roles (bell, watermelon, cherry), there is no change in RT0-2 and inside BB (RT3), and in BB1 and BB2, “F_Common Bell” is the internal winning combination. The winning probability of the entire small role increases as the probability of being determined is dramatically increased. In the inside of the BB, there is no “F_Watermelon”, “F_Strong Cherry” or “F_Middle Cherry” that overlaps with “BB1”, and the winning probability due to these single winnings is higher than RT0-2. The winning probability of the watermelon and cherry itself does not change between RT0-2 and the inside of the BB.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 29, in RT0-2 in the MB, a predetermined replay is won with a predetermined probability as in the case of RT0-2 in the non-MB, and all the small roles are in a predetermined replay. It has come to be a double win. In the MB, no. The command indicating the winning combination of 0 to 15 (winning combination command) is No. No. 0, 8-10, 14 “F_ Weak Cherry” command, No. No. 1 to 7, 11, 12, and 15 where the winning combination is the same as “F_strong cherry” in the non-MB, It is defined that 13 winning combinations are transmitted as the same winning combination command as “F_middle cherry” in non-MB (see FIG. 31).

<Priority selection table>
Next, the priority order selection table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The priority order selection table represents a result that is established according to the stop operation order (batting order) and the internal winning combination in the stop operation on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The batting order includes the batting order 1 which is the operating order of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R, the batting order 2 which is the operating order of the left reel 3L, the right reel 3R and the middle reel 3C, the middle reel 3C and the left reel 3L. Strike order 3 as the operation order of the right reel 3R, Strike order 4 as the operation order of the middle reel 3C, right reel 3R, and left reel 3L, Strike order 5 as the operation order of the right reel 3R, left reel 3L, and middle reel 3C, Right There is a batting order 6 which is the operation order of the reel 3R, the middle reel 3C, and the left reel 3L. In the MB, the predetermined replay and all the small roles are duplicated, but “F_weak cherry” (only in MB, NML6), “F_strong cherry” (NML6), “F_middle” A symbol combination corresponding to “Cherry” (NML4, 5) is displayed, and nine medals are paid out as a payout accordingly.

  For example, in RT0 in non-MB, No. When “1 Rip in F_RT0” is determined as an internal winning combination, the symbol combination relating to the Rip in RT0 (REP1) is displayed in any of the hit orders 1 to 6, and RT0 is maintained. On the other hand, no. When “F_RT2 transition lip 1” of No. 2 is determined as an internal winning combination, the symbol combination related to the RT2 transition lip (REP3) is preferentially displayed in the batting order 1 while transitioning to RT2. In the remaining batting orders 2 to 6, the symbol combination related to the RT0 transition lip (REP2) is preferentially displayed, so that the transition is made to RT0.

  In RT2 in the non-MB, no. When “Rip 1 in F_RT2” of 8 is determined as an internal winning combination, the symbol combination related to the RT2 maintenance lip (REP4, 5) is preferentially displayed in the batting order 1 and 2, so that RT2 is displayed. On the other hand, in the remaining batting orders 3 to 6, the symbol combination related to the RT0 transition lip (REP2) is preferentially displayed, so that the transition is made to RT0.

  In RT2 in the non-MB, no. 11 “F_RT2 medium WS lip 1” (WSP lip as a group combination, which will be described later) is determined as an internal winning combination, the symbol combination related to the RT2 maintenance lip (REP4) is given priority in the batting order 1 to 4 While the RT2 is maintained by the display, the symbol combinations related to the red bar W (REP7) are preferentially displayed in the remaining batting orders 5 and 6. No. in RT2 in non-MB. If 12 “WS Lip 2 during F_RT2” (WSP Lip as a group role to be described later) is determined as an internal winning combination, the symbol combination related to the RT2 maintenance Lip (REP4) is given priority in the order of batting order 1 to 4 While the RT2 is maintained by the display, the symbol combinations relating to the red bar S (REP6) are preferentially displayed in addition to the red bar W (REP7) in the remaining hitting orders 5 and 6. When such a WSP lip is won, the transition of the ART is confirmed.

  In RT2 in the non-MB, no. If 13 “SS Lip 1 during F_RT2” (SP Lip as a group role to be described later) is determined as an internal winning combination, the symbol combination related to the RT2 maintenance Lip (REP4) is given priority in the hit order 1 to 4 RT2 is maintained by the display of the symbols, while in the remaining batting orders 5 and 6, the symbol combination related to the red bar S (REP8, 9) is preferentially displayed. No. in RT2 in non-MB. When 14 “SS lip 2 in F_RT2” (SP lip as a group role to be described later) is determined as an internal winning combination, the symbol combination related to the RT2 maintenance lip (REP4) has priority in the batting order 1 to 4 RT2 is maintained by being displayed in the same manner, but in the remaining batting orders 5 and 6, in addition to the red bar S (REP8, 9), the symbol combination related to the red bar S (REP6) is preferentially displayed. . Even when such an SP lip is won, the transition of the ART is confirmed.

  No. in RT2 in non-MB. When “F-RT2 SF Lip” of 15 is determined as an internal winning combination, the symbol combination related to the RT2 maintenance Lip (REP4, 5) is preferentially displayed during the batting order 1 to 4, so that RT2 is displayed. On the other hand, in the remaining hitting orders 5 and 6, the symbol combination related to the red bar fake (red lip, REP10) is preferentially displayed. Even if such a reddish lip wins, it does not shift to ART.

  Moreover, in normal time (RT0-2) in non-MB which is not inside BB, for example, No. When “F_Left Bell 1-9” of 16-24 is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol combination related to TL Bell (NML7) in which the symbol combination of the bells is aligned with the so-called top line in the batting order 1 and 2 Is displayed preferentially, but in the remaining batting orders 3 to 6, the symbol combinations related to the XD bells (NML10 to 36) in which the symbol combinations of the bells are aligned on the winning determination line (cross down) with a probability of 1/9 are displayed. When the symbol combination related to the bell spilled eyes (HZR1 to 3) is displayed with a probability of 8/9, the process proceeds to RT1. In the inside of BB, no. When “F_Left Bell 1-9” of 16-24 is determined as an internal winning combination, TL Bell (NML7) that has a so-called top line of bell combination in hit order 1, 2 or hit order 5, 6 On the other hand, in the remaining batting orders 3 and 4, the XD bells (NML10 to 36) in which the bell symbol combinations are aligned on the winning determination line (cross down) with a probability of 1/9 are displayed. The symbol combination is displayed, and the symbol combination relating to the bell spilled eyes (HZR1 to 3) is displayed with a probability of 8/9, so that the process proceeds to RT1.

  Moreover, in normal time (RT0-2) in non-MB which is not inside BB, for example, No. When “F_medium bell 1-9” of 25-33 is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol combination related to CL bell (NML8) in which the so-called center line is aligned with the so-called center line in the batting order 3 and 4 Is displayed preferentially, but the remaining batting orders 1, 2, 5 and 6 are related to XD bells (NML10 to 36) in which the winning symbol combination line (cross-down) has a combination of bell symbols with a probability of 1/9. The symbol combination is displayed, and the symbol combination relating to the bell spilled eyes (HZR1 to 3) is displayed with a probability of 8/9, so that the process proceeds to RT1. In the inside of BB, no. When “F_medium bell 1-9” of 25-33 is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol combination related to CL bell (NML8) in which the symbol combination of the bells is aligned with the so-called center line in the batting order 1 to 4 On the other hand, in the remaining batting orders 5 and 6, the symbol combinations related to the XD bells (NML10 to 36) in which the bell symbol combinations are aligned on the winning determination line (cross down) with a probability of 1/9 are displayed. The symbol combinations related to the bell spilled eyes (HZR1 to 3) are displayed with a probability of 8/9.

  Moreover, in normal time (RT0-2) in non-MB which is not inside BB, for example, No. When “F_Right Bell 1-9” of 34 to 42 is determined as an internal winning combination, a symbol combination related to BL Bell (NML9) in which the so-called bottom line has a bell symbol combination in hitting order 5 and 6 Is displayed preferentially, but in the remaining batting orders 1 to 4, the symbol combinations related to the XD bells (NML10 to 36) in which the bell symbol combinations are aligned on the winning determination line (cross down) with a probability of 1/9 are displayed. When the symbol combination related to the bell spilled eyes (HZR1 to 3) is displayed with a probability of 8/9, the process proceeds to RT1. In the inside of BB, no. When “F_Right Bell 1-9” of 34 to 42 is determined as an internal winning combination, the symbol combination related to BL Bell (NML9) in which the bell symbol combination is aligned with the so-called bottom line at the time of batting order 3 to 6 On the other hand, in the remaining batting orders 1 and 2, the symbol combinations related to the XD bells (NML10 to 36) in which the bell symbol combinations are aligned on the winning determination line (cross down) with a probability of 1/9 are displayed. When the symbol combination relating to the bell spilled eyes (HZR1 to 3) is displayed with a probability of 8/9, the process proceeds to RT1.

  For example, no. If 43 “F_Common Bell” is determined as an internal winning combination, any combination of NML1 to 36 among NML1 to 36 will be displayed preferentially with 9 symbol combinations of NML1 to 36. Medals will be paid out. No. If 44 “F_Watermelon” is determined as an internal winning combination, the symbol combinations related to the watermelons of NML 1 and 2 are displayed in any of the batting orders 1 to 6, and the symbol combination related to the special combination of NML 3 is displayed. As long as there is a possibility of being displayed and there is no dropout of the watermelon on the middle reel 3C, four or one medal is paid out according to the winning of the watermelon or special role. No. When 45 “F_strong cherry” is determined as an internal winning combination, 9 medals are paid out by preferentially displaying the symbol combinations related to the common cherry of NML6 in any of the batting orders 1 to 6 . No. If 46 “F_middle cherries” are determined as the internal winning combination, any combination of NML4-6 SP cherries or common cherries will be displayed preferentially in any of the batting orders 1-6. Medals will be paid out.

  Also, in MB, all the small roles including NML4-6 SP cherry or common cherry are determined as internal winning combinations with replay, but any combination of cherries of NML4-6 in batting order 1-6 (Weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry) are displayed with priority, and nine medals are paid out according to the winning of the cherry.

  In accordance with the establishment of such a symbol combination display, the gaming state is shifted as follows. That is, when the display of the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 or BB2 is established, the gaming state corresponding to each becomes BB1 or BB2. The game state BB1, BB2 ends when, for example, more than 351 medals are paid out. When the display of the symbol combination corresponding to MB1 is established, the gaming state is set to MB1, and MB1 ends when, for example, more than nine medals are paid out. When the symbol combination corresponding to MB2A or MB2B is displayed, the game state is set to MB2, and MB2 ends when, for example, more than 36 medals are paid out. When the symbol combination corresponding to REP1 or REP2 is established during RT1 or RT2, the game state is shifted to RT0. When the display of the symbol combination corresponding to REP3 is established during RT1, the process proceeds to RT2. If the symbol combination corresponding to REP4 or REP5 is established during RT2, RT2 is maintained. If the pushing order fails during the hitting bell hit during RT0 or RT2, the symbol combination of the bell spilled HZR1 to 3 is established, and the process proceeds to RT1.

<Corresponding table for winning command navi numbers>
Next, the winning combination command navigation number correspondence table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The winning combination command navigation number correspondence table shows the winning combination command transmitted from the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) to the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) or the like in accordance with the winning combination in the normal state and in the MB. This shows the correspondence between the information and the navigation number (instruction monitor number) transmitted to give a so-called push order instruction (navigation instruction) by the instruction monitor of the 7-segment display 28 during ART (non-MB). is there. In the present embodiment, as described above, a combination (for example, a push order bell) in which a combination of symbols preferentially displayed according to the order of the stop operation (push order) is provided. For example, when instructing the push order “1st (perform the first stop operation on the left reel 3L)”, “1” is displayed on the instruction monitor, and the push order “2nd (the first stop operation is “2” is displayed on the instruction monitor, and the push order “3rd (perform the first stop operation on the right reel 3R)” is indicated. In this case, “3” is displayed on the instruction monitor. Such information notification regarding the reel stop operation by the instruction monitor is referred to as a navigation instruction, and the winning combination command navigation number correspondence table indicates a navigation number (instruction monitor number) corresponding to the information notification content of the navigation instruction. In addition, the winning combination in MB (No. 0-15 winning combination) includes all small combinations, but as described above, depending on the winning combination, such as weak cherry, strong cherry, middle tier cherry Combinations are displayed preferentially. Therefore, no. The winning combination of 0, 8 to 10 and 14 is treated as “F_weak cherry” (only in MB). The winning combinations of 1 to 7, 11, 12, and 15 are treated in the same way as “F_strong cherry”. The winning combination of 13 is treated in the same way as “F_middle cherries”. The winning combination command in the MB is not associated with the navigation number. The navigation number will be described later with reference to FIG.

  For example, in a non-MB in ART, No. When “Flip in RT_RT0” of 1 is determined as the internal winning combination, “1” is transmitted from the main CPU 93 to the sub CPU 102 as information on the winning combination command. At this time, the navigation number is not transmitted from the main CPU 93.

  In the non-MB in ART, No. When “F_RT2 transition lip 1 to 6” of 2 to 7 are determined as the internal winning combination, “2” is transmitted from the main CPU 93 to the sub CPU 102 as information on the winning combination command. The navigation numbers “1 to 6” corresponding to the internal winning combinations 2 to 7 are transmitted.

  In the non-MB in ART, No. When “F_RT2 Lips 1 to 3” of 8 to 10 are determined as the internal winning combination, “3” is transmitted from the main CPU 93 to the sub CPU 102 as information on the winning combination command. The navigation numbers “7-9” corresponding to the 8-10 internal winning combinations are transmitted.

  In the non-MB in ART, No. When the “WS Lips 1 and 2 in F_RT2”, “SS Lips 1 and 2 in F_RT2”, and “FS Lip in F_RT2” of 11 to 15 are determined as internal winning combinations, the main CPU 93 sends a No. “4-8” is transmitted as information of the winning combination command corresponding to each of the internal winning combinations 11 to 15. At this time, the navigation number is not transmitted from the main CPU 93.

  In the non-MB in ART, No. When “F_left bell 1 to 9” of 16 to 24 are determined as the internal winning combination, “9” is transmitted from the main CPU 93 to the sub CPU 102 as information on the winning combination command. A navigation number “7” corresponding to the internal winning combination of 16 to 24 is transmitted. No. When “F_medium bells 1 to 9” of 25 to 33 are determined as the internal winning combination, “9” is transmitted from the main CPU 93 to the sub CPU 102 as information on the winning combination command. The navigation number “8” corresponding to the internal winning combination of 25 to 33 is transmitted. No. When “F_Right Bell 1 to 9” of 34 to 42 are determined as the internal winning combination, “9” is transmitted from the main CPU 93 to the sub CPU 102 as information on the winning combination command. The navigation number “9” corresponding to the internal winning combinations 34 to 42 is transmitted.

  In the non-MB in ART, No. When the internal winning combinations 43 to 52 are determined, the main CPU 93 changes the sub CPU 102 to No. “10, 11, 13-20” is transmitted as information of the winning combination command corresponding to each of the 43 to 52 internal winning combinations. At this time, the navigation number is not transmitted from the main CPU 93.

  In the MB, no. When “F_weak cherry” of 0, 8 to 10, 14 is determined as the internal winning combination, “12” is transmitted from the main CPU 93 to the sub CPU 102 as information on the winning combination command. When “F_strong cherry” of 1 to 7, 11, 12, 15 is determined as the internal winning combination, “13” is transmitted from the main CPU 93 to the sub CPU 102 as information on the winning combination command. When 13 “F_middle cherry” is determined as the internal winning combination, “14” is transmitted from the main CPU 93 to the sub CPU 102 as information on the winning combination command. In addition, during MB and non-ART, the winning combination command is transmitted, but the navigation number is not transmitted. Thereby, for example, the sub CPU 102 can specify that one of the pressing order bells is won based on the winning combination command during non-ART, but cannot specify the correct pressing order. During ART, it is possible to specify the pressing order that is correct based on the navigation number. Such ART includes preparation for ART. Further, in the present embodiment, even if the game state is RT0 even during the ART, the navigation number is not transmitted and the navigation instruction is not performed. The navigation number information may be included in the winning combination command information and transmitted at the same time, or may be transmitted by a command unique to the navigation number separately from the winning combination command.

<Navigation table>
Next, the navigation correspondence table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The navigation correspondence table represents a correspondence relationship between navigation instructions performed on the main side and notifications (push order notification) performed on the sub side. As shown in FIG. 32, the main CPU 93 displays a numerical value of “1” to “9” on the instruction monitor to instruct navigation information about the stop operation. The numerical values “1” to “9” uniquely correspond to the navigation numbers described above. “1” to “6” respectively indicate the pressing order for instructing (notifying) the navigation, and “1” indicates “(1) (2) (3) when the pressing order is“ left, middle, right ”. ) ”Is displayed, and“ 2 ”indicates that“ (1) (3) (2) ”is displayed when the pressing order is“ left, right, middle ”, and“ 3 ”. Indicates that “(2) (1) (3)” is displayed when the pressing order is “middle, left, right”, and “4” indicates that the pressing order is “middle, right, left”. “(2) (3) (1)” is displayed, and “5” indicates “(3) (1) (2)” when the pressing order is “right, left, middle”. “6” indicates that “(3) (2) (1)” is displayed when the pressing order is “right, middle, left”. “7” to “9” indicate the pressing order indicating which one of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped first and the correct answer is obtained, and “7” indicates the first stop operation. Is performed on the left reel 3L, “8” indicates that the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C, and “9” indicates that the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R. It shows what to do with it.

  Here, although the numerical values of “1” to “9” instructed for navigation on the main side uniquely correspond to the content of the stop operation to be notified, all the players can clearly grasp the content of the notification. Not exclusively. That is, there is a possibility that the notification content cannot be grasped by some players just by displaying “6” on the instruction monitor on the main side. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the contents of the stop operation are also notified on the sub side together with the navigation instruction on the main side. Specifically, as shown in the navigation correspondence table, stop operation information is notified in the liquid crystal display device 11 under the control of the sub side. For example, when notifying that the first stop operation is to be performed on the left reel 3L, “7” is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and the left reel 3L is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 on the sub side. “1” is displayed in the upper area of the area to inform that the left reel 3L is the target of the first stop operation. Similarly, when notifying the push order “middle, left, right”, “3” is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and on the sub-side, the liquid crystal display device 11 displays an area above the reel 3C in the middle. “1”, “2” is displayed in the upper area of the left reel 3L, “3” is displayed in the upper area of the right reel 3R, and the push order is “middle, left, right”. If the reels are operated to stop in accordance with such a navigation instruction (push order notification), for example, in RT1, it is possible to avoid winning RT0 shift lip and make sure to win RT2 shift lip. In addition, when winning the push order bell, it is possible to always win the bell by avoiding the formation of the bell spill.

<Lottery group correspondence table>
Next, the lottery group correspondence table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The lottery group correspondence table handles one or a plurality of winning combinations for each lottery group, and shows the correspondence between the group winning names of the winning combinations and the common number (common No.) indicating the type. It is a representation. The lottery group includes a general-purpose lottery group A and an extra lottery group B. In lottery group A, “lost” The group role “Lose”, “Lip in F_RT0”, “Lip in F_RT2”, “Lip in F_RT2”, and “SF Lip in F_RT2” are common No. 0. The group roles “Replay”, “Batting order bell”, and “Common bell” of No. 1 are common no. No. 2 group roles “Bell”, “F_Watermelon” are single winning roles and “BB1 + F_Watermelon” are double winning roles. The group roles “Watermelon” and “F_Weak Cherry (only during MB)” of No. 3 are common No. No. 4 group roles “weak cherry”, “F_strong cherry” single winning combination and “BB1 + F_strong cherry” overlapping winning combination are common no. No. 5 group role “strong cherry”, “F_middle stage cherry” single winning combination, “BB1 + F_middle stage cherry” overlapping winning combination, and “BB2” The group roles “middle stage cherry”, “F_MB1”, and “F_MB2” of the group No. 6 are common nos. The group role “MB”, “SS Lip 1 in F_RT2” and “SS Lip 2 in F_RT2” of No. The group roles “SP Lip”, “WS Lip 1 in F_RT2”, and “WS Lip 2 in F_RT2” of No. 8 are common Nos. Nine group roles are defined as “WSP Lip”. The lottery group B is different from the lottery group A in “BB1 + F_watermelon”, “BB1 + F_strong cherry”, “BB1 + F_middle cherry”, and “BB2”, which are related to the common no. It is defined as 10 group roles “BB”. That is, since approximately 20 winning combinations are aggregated into approximately 10 group combinations by such lottery groups A and B, various tables to be described later are defined, so that the data size of the table is greatly reduced. be able to. In addition, for example, No. Since “BB1 + F_Watermelon”, “BB1 + F_Strong Cherry”, “BB1 + F_Middle Cherry”, and “BB2” of 17 to 20 have different types of group roles (common numbers) assigned by lottery groups A and B, one lottery The lottery result can be changed more than the case where only the group is provided, and thereby the gameability can be improved.

<Outlet status lottery type correspondence table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the lottery state lottery type correspondence table will be described.

  The lottery status lottery type correspondence table defines the types of lottery processing to be executed according to the ball status. As types of lottery processing, [normal] ISM acquisition lottery, [normal] CZ lottery state transition lottery, [normal] CZ lottery, [CZ1-13G] technique point lottery, [CZ14G] final game ART lottery, [CZ14G] final [ART1, 2, 3, 4] Level-up lottery, [ART4] Victory reward lottery, [ART5] extra lottery A, [ART5] extra game number lottery, [ART5] extra special stock lottery A, [ ALL] PTR type lottery, [Normal, CZ] ART grade lottery, [Normal, ART5] precursor game number lottery, [ART2,5] loop rate lottery, [ART2,5] loop lottery, [Normal] ART lottery, [CZ1 ] Boss lottery, [EXCZ] game number addition lottery, [CZ1] CZ type lottery, PTR reel lock lottery, [normal] ISM mode transition lottery [ART5] Special extra lottery, [Normal] setting change lottery, [ART5] Extra lottery B, [ART5] Extra state transition lottery, [ART5] Specialized stock lottery B, [ART2] Loop guaranteed number lottery There is. Note that the parentheses indicate an internally specified ball condition or a specific section of the ball condition. The performance state that is actually presented to the player and the internally specified play state basically match, but may not match. For example, [CZ1-13G] is a section of the ball-out state specified as the CZ1-13th game in the production state, and in this case, the production state and the ball-out state are the same. On the other hand, for example, [ART 1, 2, 3, 4] is a ball-out state that is basically identified as ARTLv1 to 4 in the production state, but for example, even if the ball-out state is [ART 4], May be referred to as ARTLv3. In this case, the performance state and the appearance state do not match. In addition, [ART5] in the payout state corresponds to ARTLv5, special preparation, PTR1 to 3, and RUSH as the production state.

<Random number correspondence table for lottery status lottery type>
Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the lottery state lottery type use random number correspondence table will be described.

  The lottery state lottery type use random number correspondence table represents a set number of random numbers used in each lottery process shown in FIG. Eight sets of set numbers 0 to 7 are provided as random number sets. The random numbers in the set numbers 0 to 3 are 16-bit random numbers in the random number range from 0 to 65535, and the random numbers in the set numbers 4 to 7 are 8-bit random numbers in the random number range from 0 to 255. These random numbers are latched (stored) at the time of input from the start switch 64 (see FIG. 9) (the time of operation of the start lever 16 (see FIG. 2)) when the corresponding lottery process is executed. The random numbers of the set numbers 0 to 3 are mainly used for lottery related to the game state (for example, lottery for internal winning combination), but may be used for lottery in the lottery state. For example, in the [normal] ISM acquisition lottery, a 16-bit random number with a set number 0 is used, and lottery is executed using the lower 8-bit random number range 0 to 255 of the 16-bit random number.

<Game lock number correspondence table>
Next, the game lock number correspondence table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The game lock number correspondence table represents a so-called game lock in which the operation is internally invalidated or delayed until a predetermined time elapses even if the player operates the start lever 16. The game lock is also referred to as freeze or reel lock. The game lock number correspondence table is “No. It defines the lock time and occurrence conditions related to 1-12 game locks.

  According to the game lock number correspondence table, no. 1 and no. The game lock No. 2 is generated with a lock time of about 2 ms, which is extremely small when BB1 (normal BB) starts and BB2 (special BB) starts. No. 3 and no. Game lock No. 4 occurs with a lock time of about 2 s at the end of BB1 (normal BB) and at the end of BB2 (special BB). No. Game lock No. 5 is called BB2 freeze 1 and is internally generated with a lock time of about 71 s when BB2 other than ART5 is won. However, no. Game lock No. 5 occurs even during ART5 if BB2 is in preparation for ART. No. The game lock No. 6 is referred to as BB2 freeze 2, and occurs internally with a lock time of about 72 s when winning BB2 other than during ART5 preparation and ART preparation. No. Game lock No. 7 is generated with a lock time of about 6 s when EXCZ is activated while staying at RT2. No. Game lock No. 8 is generated with a lock time of about 4 s when RUSH is activated. No. The game lock No. 9 is generated with a lock time of about 13 s at the start of the next game in the [CZ14] final game revival lottery. No. Ten game locks are referred to as reel lock 1 during ART5, and when [ART5] extra lottery is won, and when it is won by a reel lock lottery during PTR, which will be described later, a lock time of about 35 s is generated. However, no. Ten game locks do not occur during ART preparation even during ART5. No. Game lock No. 11 is called reel lock 2 during ART5. When [ART5] bonus special lottery is won, and when it is won by a reel lock lottery during PTR, which will be described later, a lock time of about 10 s is generated. However, no. Eleven game locks do not occur during ART preparation even during ART5. No. Twelve game locks are generated with a lock time of about 3 s when CZ is activated while staying at RT0 or RT1.

<[Normal] ISM mode transition lottery table>
Next, the [normal] ISM mode transition lottery table (setting 1) will be described with reference to FIG. For convenience, only the table related to setting 1 is shown in FIG. 37 for the [normal] ISM mode transition lottery table, but it may be a table having different contents for each setting value, or one table common to each setting value. It is good.

  [Normal] The ISM mode transfer lottery table is used for an ISM mode transfer lottery for changing (transferring) an ISM mode related to an acquisition rate / number of ISM points to be described later. As the ISM mode of the present embodiment, “normal”, “high accuracy” in which the ISM point acquisition rate is higher than “normal”, and “super high accuracy” in which the ISM point acquisition rate is higher than “high accuracy”. There are three ISM modes. [Normal] The ISM mode transition lottery table shows the group role (losing) of the lottery group A shown in FIG. 33 described above for each ISM mode (normal time, high accuracy time, ultra high accuracy time) during stay. , Replay, bell, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry, MB, SP lip, WSP lip), type of ISM mode (normal, high accuracy, ultra high accuracy) and lottery result, reference object and lottery The lottery value corresponding to each result is defined.

  According to the ISM mode transition lottery using such a [normal] ISM mode transition lottery table, for example, when the group role “replay” is won and the ISM mode is normal, the ISM mode has a probability of 253/256. Is maintained as normal, and the ISM mode shifts from normal to high accuracy with a probability of 3/256, and the ISM mode does not shift from normal to ultra high accuracy. If the ISM mode is high accuracy when the group role “Replay” is won, the ISM mode will not shift from high accuracy to normal, and the ISM mode is maintained with high probability of 255/256. The ISM mode shifts from high accuracy to ultra high accuracy with a probability of 256. If the ISM mode is ultra-high accuracy when the group role “Replay” is won, the ISM mode does not shift from the ultra-high accuracy to the normal or high-accuracy, and the ISM mode exceeds the probability of 256/256. Maintained with high accuracy.

<[Normal] ISM mode transition lottery table after setting change>
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the [normal] setting changed ISM mode transition lottery table (setting 1) will be described. As for the [Normal] changed ISM mode transition lottery table, for convenience, only the table related to setting 1 is shown in FIG. 38, but it may be a table having different contents for each setting value, or is common to each setting value. One table may be used.

  [Normal] The ISM mode transition lottery table after setting change is used for the ISM mode transition lottery for changing (transferring) the ISM mode when the set value is changed. [Normal] Changed ISM mode transition lottery table shows the changed setting value to be referred to (setting value 1 in FIG. 38) and the type of ISM mode that becomes the lottery result (normal, high accuracy, ultra high accuracy) And a lottery value corresponding to each of the reference object and the lottery result.

  According to such [normal] post-change ISM mode transition lottery table after setting change, for example, when the setting is changed to setting 1, the ISM mode after the change of setting has a probability of 223/256. It is assumed to be normal, with high probability of 32/256, and extremely high probability of 1/256.

<[Normal] ISM acquisition lottery table>
Next, a [normal] ISM acquisition lottery table (setting 1) will be described with reference to FIG. As for the [normal] ISM acquisition lottery table, only the table related to setting 1 is shown in FIG. 39 for convenience, but it may be a common table for each setting value.

  [Normal] The ISM acquisition lottery table is used for an ISM acquisition lottery for acquiring ISM points in a normal state. The ISM point is provided as a necessary condition for the CZ lottery described later. In this embodiment, the CZ lottery is not performed unless the ISM point is 1 or more. [Normal] The ISM acquisition lottery table shows the group role (losing, lottery) of the aforementioned lottery group A shown in FIG. 33 for each ISM mode (normal time, high accuracy time, ultra high accuracy time) during stay. Replay, bell, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry, MB, SP lip, WSP lip) and ISM points given as lottery results (in this embodiment, “0”, “3”, “5”) , '10', '20', '30') and lottery values corresponding to each of the reference object and the lottery result.

  According to the ISM acquisition lottery using such a [normal] ISM acquisition lottery table, the relative role of “watermelon” or “cherry” (weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry) as a rare role is relative. There is a high possibility that ISM points are given as lottery results, and the expectation of ISM points to be given is also increased. In addition, ISM points may be awarded according to the lottery result even when “SP Lip” or “WSP Lip” of the group role is won.

<[Normal] CZ lottery state transition lottery table>
Next, the [normal] CZ lottery state transition lottery table (setting 1) will be described with reference to FIG. As for the [normal] CZ lottery state transition lottery table, only the table related to setting 1 is shown in FIG. 40 for convenience, but it may be a table having different contents for each setting value, or one common to each setting value. It may be a table.

  [Normal] CZ lottery state transition lottery table is a CZ lottery for shifting (changing) a CZ lottery state (CZ lottery state) to be described later periodically every time a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) are consumed. Used for state transition lottery. The CZ lottery state determines the ease with which the CZ lottery is won. In the present embodiment, three types of “LOW”, “MIDDLE”, and “HIGH” are provided in accordance with the ease of winning. Note that, depending on the setting value, it may be easy to win the same, and as shown in FIG. 41 as an example of setting 1, “LOW” and “MIDDLE” may have the same winning probability.

[Normal] The CZ lottery state transition lottery table includes a predetermined cycle (cycle A, cycle B, special cycle) to be referred to, and a CZ lottery state type (“LOW”, “MIDDLE”, “HIGH” as a lottery result) And a lottery value corresponding to each of the reference object and the lottery result. The period A, the period B, and the special period are assigned in advance to game points specified for every 50 games, for example, before reaching the number of ceiling games (1000 G in the present embodiment). For example, the period A corresponds to the 100G, 150G, 350G, 500G, 550G, 700G, 750G, 900G, and 950G, and the period B corresponds to the 1G, 50G, 200G, and 250G. Eyes, 400G, 450G, 650G, 800G, and 850G, and the special period corresponds to 300G and 600G. Note that the period A, the period B, and the special period may be irregularly changed by lottery or the like.

  According to the CZ lottery state transition lottery using such a [normal] CZ lottery state transition lottery table, the type of CZ lottery state (“LOW” at the timing of a predetermined game cycle (cycle A, cycle B, special cycle). "," MIDDLE "," HIGH ") may change. Also, for example, at the timing of the special cycle, the winning probability of “HIGH” which is advantageous as the CZ lottery state is higher than the timing of the cycle A and the cycle B. Therefore, the transition lottery which tends to be monotonous periodically is changed. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that a favorable CZ lottery state may be entered at any periodic timing.

<[Normal] CZ lottery table>
Next, the [normal] CZ lottery table (setting 1) will be described with reference to FIG. As for the [normal] CZ lottery table, only the table related to setting 1 is shown in FIG. 41 for convenience, but it may be a table having different contents for each setting value, or may be a table common to each setting value. Good.

  [Normal] The CZ lottery table is used for CZ lottery for determining whether or not to shift from the normal state to CZ or EXCZ when there are one or more ISM points. [Normal] The CZ lottery table includes the types of CZ lottery states to be referred to (“LOW”, “MIDDLE”, “HIGH”), lottery results (non-winning (non-transferable), winning (transferable)), The lottery value corresponding to each of the reference object and the lottery result is defined.

  According to the CZ lottery using such a [normal] CZ lottery table, if there are 1 or more ISM points regardless of the winning combination, for example, if the CZ lottery state is “LOW” or “MIDLLE”, 1 / If the CZ lottery state is “HIGH”, the winning result indicating the shift to CZ or EXCZ is obtained with the probability of approximately 1/5. Based on such a winning result, the normal state shifts to CZ or EXCZ through the CZ precursor. If the CZ lottery is performed during the CZ precursor and the winning result indicating that the CZ lottery shifts to CZ or EXCZ is obtained again, the winning result is stored until the end of CZ or EXCZ or the end of ART. Then, based on the winning result, the process proceeds to CZ or EXCZ again through the CZ precursor.

<[Normal] ART lottery table>
Next, the [normal] ART lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the [normal] ART lottery table is provided for each set value, but may be a common table for each set value.

  [Normal] The ART lottery table is used for an ART lottery for determining whether or not to shift from the normal state to the ART when a predetermined condition is satisfied. [Normal] The ART lottery table corresponds to the set values (settings 1 to 6) to be referred to, lottery results (non-winning (ART non-winning), winning (ART winning)), reference targets, and lottery results. The lottery value is specified. The predetermined conditions for executing the ART lottery are as follows: (1) normal state, (2) ISM point is “0”, (3) CZ lottery state is “HIGH”, (4) CZ precursor or non-ART precursor , (5) The case where all the conditions of (1) to (5) are satisfied, such as when the bell is won.

  According to the ART lottery using such a [normal] ART lottery table, when all the conditions (1) to (5) are satisfied, for example, if the setting is 1, the normal state with a probability of 6/256 A winning result (ART winning) indicating that the state is shifted to ART is obtained. Based on such a winning result, the state shifts from ART to ART (ARTLv2) through ART precursors.

<[CZ1] CZ type lottery table>
Next, the [CZ1] CZ type lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The [CZ1] CZ type lottery table is provided for each set value, but may be a common table for each set value. In addition, the [CZ1] CZ type lottery table is provided for each type of CZ lottery state (“LOW”, “MIDDLE”, “HIGH”).

  [CZ1] The CZ type lottery table is used for CZ type lottery for determining the type of CZ (“normal CZ”, “determined CZ”) according to the result of the CZ lottery immediately before CZ1G. [CZ1] The CZ type lottery table is provided for each CZ lottery state (“LOW”, “MIDDLE”, “HIGH”), the set value (settings 1 to 6) to be referred to, and the lottery result (“ Normal CZ "," Determined CZ ") and lottery values corresponding to the reference object and lottery results. “Normal CZ” means that a predetermined effect is executed until the 14th G of CZ, and after that, basically it does not shift to ART, and “Final CZ” executes a predetermined effect until the 14th G of CZ. Then, the transition to ART will be confirmed. In addition, when “determined CZ” is obtained as the winning result of the CZ type GZ CZ type lottery, the CZ14G final game ART lottery described later forcibly becomes an ART winning.

  According to the CZ type lottery using such a [normal] CZ type lottery table, it is possible to determine in advance whether or not to shift to ART in the CZ1G, and after the end of the CZ14G based on the determination result It is possible to shift to ART (ARTLv2).

<[CZ1] Boss lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the [CZ1] boss lottery table (setting 1) will be described. For the sake of convenience, only the table relating to setting 1 is shown in FIG. 44 as the [CZ1] boss lottery table, but it may be a table having different contents for each setting value, or may be a table common to each setting value. .

  [CZ1] The boss lottery table is used for the boss lottery for defining the prescribed number of times conditions related to the type of the boss character that appears in the CZ14G in the CZ1G. As the number-of-times condition, the winning number of the group role “replay” in CZ 2 to 11G (replay winning number) is targeted. A boss character that raises the expectation level of ART entry will appear in the CZ14G. In the present embodiment, as the boss character appearing in the CZ14G, a normal boss and a specific boss are provided. Of these, the specific boss is a boss character having a high expectation level for ART entry.

  [CZ1] The boss lottery table defines a set value to be a reference target, a specified number of times conditions (0 to 3 times) to be a lottery result, and a lottery value corresponding to each of the reference target and the lottery result. In the case of setting 1, for example, the specified number of times condition is set to “3 times” with a probability of 232/256, the specified number of times condition is set to “2 times” with a probability of 18/256, and specified with a probability of 4/256. The number of times condition is set to “1 time”, and the specified number of times condition is set to “0 time” with a probability of 2/256. The smaller the number of times set as the prescribed number of times condition, the easier the condition is satisfied, and the specific boss is likely to appear in the CZ14G.

  According to the boss lottery using such a [CZ1] boss lottery table, the condition (predetermined number of times) for causing the specific boss to appear in the CZ last game in CZ1G can be determined in advance. Based on the conditions, the specific boss can appear in the CZ14G according to the number of replay wins in the CZ2-11G. In other words, even if the number of wins for replay is small, there is a possibility that a specific boss may appear depending on the specified number of conditions. The degree can be increased moderately.

<[CZ1-13G] technique point lottery table>
Next, the [CZ1-13G] technique point lottery table (setting 1) will be described with reference to FIG. For convenience, the [CZ1-13G] technique point lottery table shows only the table related to setting 1 in FIG. 45, but it may be a table having different contents for each setting value, or one table common to each setting value. It is good.

  The [CZ1-13G] technique point lottery table is used for technique point lottery for acquiring technique points for determining the ranks of techniques (technical ranks A to E) to be described later for the boss character in the CZ1 to 13G. . The skill rank is used as a parameter that makes it easier to execute an effect of defeating the boss character as the number of acquired technique points increases. Depending on the number of skill points acquired (cumulative number), a meter is displayed in CZ1 to 13G, and the number of meters displayed so as to increase the expectation to an effective skill rank as the number of technique points acquired increases. And the display color changes. In the present embodiment, regarding the skill points, when the number of acquisition is 0 to 4, the skill rank is A, when the number of acquisition is 5 to 9, the technique rank is B, and when the number of acquisition is 10 to 14, the technique rank C is acquired. When the number is 15 to 19, the skill rank is D, and when the number is 20, the skill rank is E. If the number of technique points acquired exceeds 20, the acquired number is corrected to the upper limit of 20.

  The [CZ1-13G] technique point lottery table is used for technique point lottery for acquiring the technique points as described above. [CZ1-13G] The skill point lottery table is a group of the lottery group A shown in FIG. 33 to be referred to (losing, replaying, bell, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry, MB, SP lip, WSP Lip), technique points given as lottery results (in this embodiment, “0”, “1”, “3”, “5”, “10”, “15”, “20”), and reference The lottery value corresponding to each of the target and the lottery result is defined.

  According to the technique point lottery using such a [CZ1-13G] technique point lottery table, when the group role “watermelon” or “cherry” (weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry) serving as a rare role is won, In particular, there is a high possibility that the technique points are given as a lottery result, and the expectation level of the technique points to be given is also increased.

<[CZ14G] Final game ART lottery table>
Next, the [CZ14G] final game ART lottery table (setting 1) will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the [CZ14G] final game ART lottery table, for convenience, shows only the table related to setting 1 in FIG. 46, but may be a table with different contents for each setting value, or as one table common to each setting value. Also good.

  [CZ14G] The final game ART lottery table is used for the final game ART lottery for determining whether or not to shift to ART in the 14G as the final game of CZ. [CZ14G] The final game ART lottery table is a boss character (ordinary boss, specific boss) determined according to the CZ2 to 11G replay winning times and a skill rank determined according to the CZ1 to 13G skill points. A plurality are provided according to combinations with (A to E). [CZ14G] The final game ART lottery table includes combinations of boss characters (ordinary bosses and specific bosses) to be referred to and technique ranks (AE), lottery results (non-winning (ART non-winning), winning (ART And a lottery value corresponding to each of the reference object and the lottery result.

  According to such a final game ART lottery using the [CZ14G] final game ART lottery table, for example, a winning result (ART winning) indicating that the player shifts to ART according to the combination of the normal boss and the skill rank A is obtained. In such a case, a normal boss appears on the CZ 14G, and an effect that defeats the normal boss by executing a technique corresponding to the technique rank A is executed, and the process shifts to ART (ARTLv2). In addition, it is easier to win an ART when a specific boss appears than a normal boss. Furthermore, the higher the skill rank from A to E, the easier it is to win an ART. Can be raised. In addition, when “determined CZ” is determined by the CZ1G CZ type lottery described above, the game shifts to ART regardless of the result of the final game ART lottery. An effect according to the combination may be executed.

<[CZ14G] Final game rebirth lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the [CZ14G] final game restoration lottery table (setting 1) will be described. Note that the [CZ14G] final game revival lottery table is shown only in FIG. 47 for convenience, but may be a table having different contents for each set value, or as one table common to each set value. Also good.

  [CZ14G] The final game revival lottery table indicates that if the final game ART lottery described above results in an ART non-winning in the 14th G, which is the final game of CZ, there is a possibility of winning an ART depending on the winning combination. Used for a final game revival lottery. [CZ14G] The final game reviving lottery table is a group of the lottery group A shown in FIG. 33 to be referred to (losing, replaying, bell, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry, MB, SP lip, WSP Rip), lottery results (non-winning (ART non-winning), winning (ART winning)), and lottery values corresponding to the reference object and lottery results.

  According to the final game revival lottery using the [CZ14G] final game revival lottery table, in the final game (14G) of CZ, a non-winning result is obtained by the final game ART lottery unrelated to the winning combination. Even if there is a case, there is a possibility of winning an ART depending on the winning combination (group role), and if the result of winning the ART is obtained by this final game revival lottery, the boss character that won once is defeated A defeating effect is executed and the process shifts to ART (ARTLv2).

<[EXCZ] Game Number Addition Rottery Table>
Next, the [EXCZ] game number addition lottery table (setting 1) will be described with reference to FIG. For the sake of convenience, only the table relating to setting 1 is shown in FIG. 48 as the [EXCZ] game number addition lottery table, but it may be a table having different contents for each setting value, or as one table common to each setting value. Also good.

  [EXCZ] The game number addition lottery table is used for the game number addition lottery for adding the number of EXCZ games in EXCZ. [EXCZ] The number-of-games lottery table is a group of the lottery group A shown in FIG. 33 to be referred to (losing, replaying, bell, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry, MB, SP Lip, WSP Rip), lottery results (non-winning, winning (3G, 5G, 7G)) and lottery values corresponding to each of the reference object and lottery results.

  According to such a game number addition lottery using the [EXCZ] game number addition lottery table, the EXCZ game number “watermelon” or “cherry” (weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry), which is a rare role. ) Can be extended in accordance with the winning of), so that the period of EXCZ can be extended, so that it can be differentiated from CZ set to a certain number of games (14G) and the gameability can be improved.

<[ART1,2,3,4] Level-up lottery table>
Next, the [ART 1, 2, 3, 4] level-up lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIGS. 49 to 53, the [ART 1, 2, 3, 4] level-up lottery table is provided for each internal level such as ART 1 to 4 and ART 4 (previous ART 5). A common table may be used. Further, the level-up lottery table corresponding to ART4 is provided so as to be different between when shifting from ART3 to ART4 and when shifting from ART5 to ART4 (see FIGS. 52 and 53). It is good also as a common table without distinguishing. Furthermore, the [ART 1, 2, 3, 4] level-up lottery table is provided for each set value, but may be a common table for each set value.

  The [ART 1, 2, 3, 4] level-up lottery table is used for level-up lottery in ART1-4 to internally determine the transition of the ART level (ART1-4). The internal ART1 to 4 and the production ARTLv1 to 4 are basically advanced at the same level so as to be promoted or demoted one step at a time according to the result of the level-up lottery. Executed. However, in this embodiment, in ARTLv2 that is predetermined as a specific ART level, when the level-up lottery is basically won before the predetermined number of games (20G) is consumed as one set, ART2 is internally used. Although the process shifts from ART3 to ART3, an effect as if demoted from ARTLv2 to ARTLv1 is executed. Note that ARTLv2 (ART2) may continue for a predetermined number of games or more (one set or more) based on the winning results of a loop lottery or loop guaranteed number lottery described later.

  The [ART 1, 2, 3, 4] level-up lottery table is distinguished for each of the internal ART1 to ART4 and ART4 (previous ART5), and is the above-described figure that is a reference target for each set value (setting 1 to 6). Group role of lottery group A shown in 33 (losing, replaying, bell, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry, MB, SP Lip, WSP Lip), lottery result (non-winning, winning), reference object and The lottery value corresponding to each lottery result is defined. Note that the level-up lottery table (ART4 (previous ART5)) in FIG. 53 used when the previous time is ART5 corresponds to a predetermined group combination (SP lip) more than the level-up lottery table (ART4) in FIG. The lottery value is specified so that it is difficult to win in the level-up lottery, but the lottery value may be specified so that it is easy to win.

  According to the level-up lottery using the [ART 1, 2, 3, 4] level-up lottery table, the following effects can be executed.

  For example, in the present embodiment, in the specific ART levels, ARTLv2 and ARTLv4, a screen for selecting a battle character corresponding to each level is displayed at the start of each, and an effect that the battle character is determined is executed. The In addition, at the end of ARTLv2 and ARTLv4, a battle effect according to each level is executed. For example, in ARTLv2, a level-up lottery is performed for each game according to the group role before the prescribed number of games (20G) is consumed, and an effect of playing against the character is executed. In such an ARTLv2, when the level-up lottery is not won, the ARTLv2 is demoted to the ARTLv1. On the other hand, when the level-up lottery is won, the game shifts from ART2 to ART3 internally after the prescribed number of games is exhausted, but as the effect, an effect that is demoted from ARTLv2 to ARTLv1 is executed. After that, even if the level-up lottery is not won in ARTLv1, which will be ART3 internally, an effect that will be promoted to ARTLv2 after the specified number of games has been exhausted is executed, and internally it will be shifted to ART2. It returns to the state where the level on production and the internal level match. In addition, in ARTLv1, which is internally ART3, even if the level-up lottery is won twice or more, an effect that is promoted after the prescribed number of games is exhausted is executed. Internally, the transition from ART3 to ART4 and further from ART4 to ART5 through special preparations will be made. Therefore, at the end of ARTLv2, by switching to a battle effect indicating that it was actually ARTLv4, an effect of promotion from ARTLv4 to ARTLv5 is executed. Note that even when a level up lottery is not won in a specific ARTLv2, there is a case where a loop lottery or a loop guaranteed number lottery described later is won at the start of the ARTLv2. In this case, ARTLv2 will continue for 40G or more for two sets, but even during such continuation of ARTLv2, if a level-up lottery is won in the same manner as described above, an effect that is demoted as an effect is executed. .

  According to such a step-by-step production of ART, it is possible to execute an effect such that the level is basically promoted or demoted one step at a time. Since the appearance of being demoted is executed, the impression that the number of games has increased can be strengthened by demoting and then promoting rather than demoting after promotion, thereby enhancing the interest of the game be able to. In addition, there is a possibility that there will be a stage of promotion of two or more stages to ARTLv4 or the like at the end of ARTLv2, so there is an expectation that there may be such promotion of two or more stages. This can also enhance the interest of the game. Furthermore, in the ARTLv1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to make it appear that it is easier to promote than the promotion based on the actual level-up lottery probability, and the degree of expectation for promotion can be increased.

<[ART2] Loop guaranteed number lottery table>
Next, the [ART2] loop guaranteed number random determination table (setting 1) will be described with reference to FIG. For the sake of convenience, only the table related to setting 1 is shown in FIG. 54 as the [ART2] loop guarantee count lottery table, but it may be a table having different contents for each setting value, or as one table common to each setting value. Also good.

  [ART2] The loop guarantee count lottery table is used for loop guarantee count lottery for determining the loop guarantee count described later at the start of ARTLv2 (ART2). The loop guarantee count means the number of times that a specific ARTLv2 is guaranteed to be continued once or more when a loop guarantee count lottery is won. For example, if the loop guarantee count is won as 1, the effect indicating continuation is executed unless the level-up lottery described above is won, and one set 20G is given when ARTLv2 basically ends with one set 20G. Continue until digested to 40G. If the loop guarantee count is won as 2 times or 3 times, the ARTLv2 is continued until 60G and 80G are digested by giving 2 sets 40G or 3 sets 60G as described above. However, if the loop guarantee count is won, for example, 3 times, if the level-up lottery is won in the second set of ARTLv2, one out of the 3 loop guarantee counts is digested as the second set. On the other hand, the loop guarantee count of 2 is retained as it is not digested for the remaining 2 sets. Even if ARTLv2 wins a level-up lottery while continuing according to the number of loop guarantees, it will be demoted to ARTLv1 on the stage while moving to ART3 internally. Depending on the winning combination, the process may be internally shifted to ART3 and may be promoted to ARTLv3 in terms of performance.

  [ART2] Loop guaranteed number lottery table refers to a later-described grade (common first time, A to C) to be referred to, and loop guaranteed number (non-winning (0 times), 1 to 3 times) as a lottery result The lottery value corresponding to each of the target and the lottery result is defined. The grade is a parameter (grade, continuation rate) that is determined when the ART is won, etc., and determines whether or not a specific ARTLv2 is to be continued. Used when determining the loop rate to be determined by lottery. For example, when there is no first win of ART and the start of the first ARTLv2 (ART2), the first grade common is applied, and the number of loop guarantees is determined to be 0 for non-winning with a probability of 169/256, 79/256 The loop guarantee count is determined to be 1 with probability, the loop guarantee count is determined to be 2 with a probability of 8/256, and the loop guarantee count is not determined to be 3. Grades A to C are determined when the ART is won, and are applied when demoted to ARTLv2 after the end of ART. By the way, in setting 1, although the loop guarantee count lottery is performed when ARTLv2 is started after ART ends, the loop guarantee count is determined as 1 to 3 according to the specified contents of the [ART2] loop guarantee count lottery table. It will be 0 times (non-winning) without fail. In addition, if a level-up lottery or a loop lottery described later is won before the loop guarantee count is used, the winning result is prioritized so that the loop guarantee count is not used and is held as it is, and the level will be raised in the next ARTLv2 If a lottery or loop lottery is not won, the ARTLv2 will be continued using the loop guarantee count.

  According to such a loop guarantee number lottery using the [ART2] loop guarantee number lottery table, when entering a specific ARTLv2, the loop guarantee number is determined as the set number of the ARTLv2, and there is no winning by the level-up lottery. However, ARTLv2 can be continued until the number of games that have been determined as the number of loop guarantees is added, so the chances of winning can be increased by level-up lottery during ARTLv2, and the degree of expectation for promotion can be increased. Can be raised.

<[ART4] Victory reward lottery table>
Next, the [ART4] victory reward lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. [ART4] The winning reward lottery table is provided for each set value, but may be a common table for each set value.

  [ART4] The winning reward lottery table is used for a winning reward lottery for determining a reward in the case of winning in the battle performance executed in ARTLv4 at the start of ARTLv4 (ART4). The victory of the battle effect occurs in the final game (20G) of ARTLv4 when a winning result is obtained in the above-described level-up lottery in ART4, or when BB is determined as an internal winning combination. In ARTLv4, if the level up lottery is not won or the final game is BB non-winning, the reward determined at the start of ARTLv4 is not obtained and discarded. Rewards are obtained as PTR1 to PTR1 in the additional specialization zone, and the number of games tends to increase in the order of PTR1, PTR2, and PTR3, and the average number of acquired games increases as the number of additional games.

  [ART4] The winning reward lottery table includes setting values (settings 1 to 6) to be referred to, rewards (PTR1, PTR2, and PTR3) that are lottery results, and lottery values corresponding to the reference objects and lottery results. Is stipulated. For example, in the case of setting 1, PTR1 is determined as a reward with a probability of 192/256, PTR2 is determined as a reward with a probability of 46/256, and PTR3 is determined as a reward with a probability of 18/256. If the promotion to ARTLv5 is confirmed according to another opportunity, the winning reward lottery using the [ART4] winning reward lottery table is canceled, and the PTR type using the [ALL] PTR type lottery table described later. Rewards (PTR1 to 3) are determined by lottery. In addition, during ARTLv4, in order to perform PTR stock described later at the time of winning BB2, rewards (PTR1 to 3) already determined by winning reward lottery using the [ART4] winning reward lottery table may be referred to.

  According to the winning reward lottery using the [ART4] winning reward lottery table, the type of PTR as the additional specialization zone can be determined in advance, and the production can be smoothly advanced from ARTLv4 to ARTLv5. Can do.

<[ART5] Additional state transition lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, [ART5] additional state transition lottery table (setting 1) will be described. For the sake of convenience, only the table relating to setting 1 is shown in FIG. 56 as the [ART5] added state transition lottery table, but it may be a table having different contents for each setting value, or as one table common to each setting value. Also good.

  [ART5] Added state transition lottery table is an added state for changing (transferring) the added state (usually high accuracy, super high accuracy) related to the addition of the number of games during ART5 (in ARTLv5, during ART preparation) Used for transition lottery. As an added state of the present embodiment, “normal” and “normal”, the expectation of the number of added games is larger, “high accuracy”, and the expectation of the added number of games is larger than “high”, “super high” There are three additional states such as “Correct”. [ART5] The added state transition lottery table is a group combination (losing) of the lottery group B shown in FIG. 33 to be referred to for each added state (normal time, high accuracy time, ultra high accuracy time) during the stay. , Replay, bell, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry, MB, SP lip, WSP lip, BB), and the added state (usually, high accuracy, ultra high accuracy) as a lottery result The lottery value corresponding to each of the target and the lottery result is defined. In this embodiment, the extra state transition lottery is executed when BB1 is won, but it is not executed during BB1 (normal BB), BB2 (special BB), or during specialization preparation. It has become. Further, when the ARTLv1 to 4 are being executed as effects, the added state transition lottery is not executed. The result of the added state transition lottery is applied as the added state of the next game. In the added state, the initial value is set as “normal”, and is set as “normal” in the final game of ARTLv5.

  According to the added state transition lottery using the [ART5] additional state transition lottery table, when the group role “watermelon” or “cherry” (weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry) serving as a rare role is won, The possibility of obtaining “high accuracy” or “ultra high accuracy” is high, and the more highly accurate or “ultra high accuracy” is, the more difficult it is to shift to “normal”. Can increase the interest of the game.

<[ART5] Add lottery A table>
Next, the [ART5] extra lottery A table will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIGS. 57 to 59, the [ART5] extra lottery A table is provided for each additional state (normal, high accuracy, ultra high accuracy) and set values (settings 1 to 6). In particular, the data size of the entire table is reduced by using common lottery value data.

  [ART5] The extra lottery A table is used in the extra lottery A for determining the later-described extra game number lottery table (tables 1 to 7) related to the extra game number in ART5. The extra lottery A is executed during ARTLv5, during ART preparation, or during PTR1 to PTR3. In this embodiment, extra lottery A is executed when BB1 is won, but is not executed during BB1 (normal BB), BB2 (special BB), and specialization preparation. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the [ART5] extra lottery A table (normal) is a basic table that is referred to when the additional state is “normal”, and is a set value (settings 1 to 6). For each lottery group B to be referenced (watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry) and special role (BB1) belonging to the group role “BB”, and lottery results (non-winning, tables 1 to 7) ) And a lottery value corresponding to each of the reference object and the lottery result. For example, if the added state is “normal” and set to 1, when the watermelon is won, it becomes non-winning with a probability of 230/256, Table 1 is determined with a probability of 6/256, and Table 2 is determined with a probability of 17/256. Table 3 is determined with a probability of 2/256, Table 4 is determined with a probability of 1/256, and Tables 5 to 7 are not determined.

  As shown in FIG. 58, the [ART5] extra lottery A table (high accuracy) is a table referred to when the added state is “high accuracy”. The [ART5] extra lottery A table (high accuracy) defines the reference object, lottery result, and lottery value in the same manner as the [ART5] extra lottery A table (normal). For some lottery values, [ART5] It is defined as a value obtained by doubling or sharing the corresponding lottery value in the extra lottery A table (normal). That is, in the case of “high accuracy” and setting 1, the lottery values corresponding to the tables 1 to 4 which are won in the lottery result at the time of winning the watermelon are not defined as actual values, and [ART5] extra lottery A table The corresponding lottery value defined in (normal) is used twice. Thus, for example, if the added state is “high accuracy” and set to 1, when the watermelon is won, it becomes non-winning with a probability of 204/256, and Table 1 is determined with a probability of 12/256, with a probability of 34/256. Table 2 is determined, Table 3 is determined with a probability of 4/256, Table 4 is determined with a probability of 2/256, and Tables 5 to 7 are not determined. Similarly, in the case of “high accuracy” and setting 2 to 6, when the lottery value when winning the lottery result when the watermelon is won, no actual value is defined, and [ART5] extra lottery A table ( The corresponding lottery value defined in (Normal) is doubled and used. In addition, in the case of “high accuracy” and setting 1 to 6, when a strong cherry is won, a middle cherry is won, or a lottery value is determined as a result of lottery at the time of BB1, [ART5] Add lottery A table ( The corresponding lottery value defined in (Normal) is used as a common value as it is. According to the [ART5] extra lottery A table (high accuracy), the data size can be made smaller than that of the [ART5] extra lottery A table (normal) that defines all actual lottery values.

  As shown in FIG. 59, the [ART5] extra lottery A table (ultra-high accuracy) is a table that is referred to when the extra state is “ultra-high accuracy”. The [ART5] extra lottery A table (ultra-high accuracy) defines reference objects, lottery results, and lottery values in the same manner as the [ART5] extra lottery A table (normal). Is defined as a value obtained by doubling or sharing the corresponding lottery values in the [ART5] extra lottery A table (normal) or the [ART5] extra lottery A table (high accuracy). That is, in the case of “ultra-high accuracy” and setting 1, the lottery values corresponding to the tables 1 to 4 that are won in the lottery result at the time of winning the watermelon are not specified, and [ART5] extra lottery A The corresponding lottery value in the table (high accuracy) is doubled and used. In short, the corresponding lottery value defined in [ART5] extra lottery A table (normal) is used by multiplying it by four. Thus, for example, if the added state is “ultra-high accuracy” and set to 1, when the watermelon is won, it becomes non-winning with a probability of 152/256, and Table 1 is determined with a probability of 24/256, with a probability of 68/256. Table 2 is determined, Table 3 is determined with a probability of 8/256, Table 4 is determined with a probability of 4/256, and Tables 5 to 7 are not determined. Similarly, in the case of “ultra-high accuracy” and setting 2 to 6, when the lottery value when winning the lottery result when watermelon is won, the actual value is not defined, and [ART5] extra lottery A table The corresponding lottery value of (high accuracy) is doubled (the corresponding lottery value specified in the normal case is quadrupled) and used. In addition, for the lottery value in the case of “ultra-high accuracy” and the setting 1 to 6 where the lottery result at the time of weak cherry winning is won, the corresponding lottery value in the [ART5] extra lottery A table (high accuracy) is set. It is used after being doubled (the corresponding lottery value specified in usual is four times). Furthermore, in the case of “ultra-high accuracy” and setting 1 to 6, when a strong cherry wins, a middle cherry wins, or a lottery value wins as a result of BB1 win, [ART5] Add lottery A table The corresponding lottery value defined in (normal) is used as it is as a common value. Such [ART5] extra lottery A table (super high accuracy) can also reduce the data size.

<[ART5] Extra lottery table B>
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, [ART5] extra lottery B table (setting 1) will be described. For the sake of convenience, only the table related to setting 1 is shown in FIG. 60 as the [ART5] extra lottery B table, but it may be a table having different contents for each setting value, or may be a table common to each setting value. Good.

  [ART5] The extra lottery B table is an extra for determining an extra game number lottery table (tables 1 to 7), which will be described later, related to the number of extra games during BB1 (normal BB), PTR1 to 3, and RUSH. Used for lottery B. [ART5] The extra lottery B table is used only at the time of winning the group role “SP Lip” belonging to the lottery group B in BB1 (normal BB), PTR1 to 3, and RUSH or “WSP Lip”. It is a table that defines group roles “SP Lip” and “WSP Lip” to be referenced, lottery results (non-winning, tables 1 to 7), and lottery values corresponding to each of the reference subjects and lottery results. ing. For example, when the group combination “SP lip” is won in BB1 of setting 1 (normal BB), the extra lottery B is executed, and Table 5 is determined with a probability of 250/256, and Table 6 is determined with a probability of 6/256. Is not determined, and the non-winning and the tables 1 to 4 and 7 are not determined.

<[ART5] Special extra lottery table>
Next, the [ART5] special extra lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. [ART5] The special extra lottery table is provided for each set value (settings 1 to 6), but may be a common table for each set value.

  [ART5] The special extra lottery table is a special extra lottery table for determining the extra game number lottery table (tables 1 to 7) to be described later related to the extra game number when the replay is won ten times continuously in PTR2. Used. [ART5] The special addition lottery table includes setting values (settings 1 to 6) to be referred to, lottery results (non-winning, tables 1 to 7), and lottery values corresponding to the reference objects and lottery results. It prescribes. For example, in PTR 2 of setting 1, a predetermined fixed number of games is added up to 9 consecutive winnings of the group role “Replay”, while special winnings are added when the winning of the group role “Replay” is continued 10 times. A lottery is executed, table 5 is determined with a probability of 220/256, table 6 is determined with a probability of 33/256, and table 7 is determined with a probability of 3/256.

<[ART5] Extra game number lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the [ART5] extra game number lottery table will be described. The [ART5] extra game number lottery table is divided into tables 1-7. [ART5] The extra game number lottery table (tables 1 to 7) is provided for each setting value (settings 1 to 6), but may be a common table for each setting value.

  [ART5] As for the extra game number lottery table, tables 1 to 7 corresponding to the case of winning in the various extra lotteries described above are selected during ARTLv5, PTR, RUSH, or normal BB (BB1), and the extra game number is selected. Used for lottery game number lottery to determine the number of games. [ART5] Additional game number lottery table includes reference values (settings 1 to 6) to be referred to, additional game numbers (10, 20, 30, 50, 123, 321) to be a lottery result, reference objects and lottery The lottery value corresponding to each result is defined. For example, when the extra game number lottery is executed with reference to setting 1 in Table 2, “10” is acquired as the additional game number with a probability of 226/256, and “20” as the additional game number with the probability of 16/256. Acquire '30' as an additional game number with a probability of 8/256, acquire '50' as an additional game number with a probability of 4/256, and increase as a game number with a probability of 2/256 ' There is no possibility of acquiring 123 and acquiring “321” as the number of added games. Such tables 1 to 7 are commonly used according to the winning results (selection results) of the extra lottery A and B, and the extra lottery A and B are also used by using different extra lottery A tables and extra lottery B tables, respectively. Since lottery is performed, it is possible to prevent the number of added games from being monotonously determined by lottery.

<[ART5] Specialized stock lottery A table added>
Next, referring to FIG. 63, [ART5] additional specialized stock lottery A table (setting 1 will be described. Note that the [ART5] additional specialized stock lottery A table includes only the table related to setting 1 for convenience. As shown in FIG. 63, a table having different contents for each set value may be used, or a table common to each set value may be used.

  [ART5] The additional specialized stock lottery A table is used for the additional specialized stock lottery A for activating "RUSH" or "PTR" when winning with the above-described additional lottery A in ART5. [ART5] Addition-specific stock lottery A table shows the group role of lottery group B shown in FIG. 33 to be referred to (losing, replaying, bell, watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry, MB, SP Lip , WSP Lip, BB), lottery results (non-winning, “RUSH”, “PTR”), and lottery values corresponding to each of the reference object and lottery results. For example, if a lottery wins a group role and wins the extra lottery A, an extra special stock lottery A is executed and it becomes non-winning with a probability of 128/256 and wins “RUSH” with a probability of 102/256. , “PTR” wins with a probability of 26/256. At the time of winning “RUSH”, the number of precursor games suggesting the transition from ARTLv5 to RUSH is determined by a precursor game number lottery described later. If “RUSH” is won again during the sign game of ARTLv5, the sign game number lottery is not re-executed, but only information indicating that “RUSH” is won is stocked, and after the completion of RUSH, A game number lottery is executed, and the number of precursor games is determined. At the time of winning “PTR”, one of PTR 1 to 3 is determined by PTR type lottery described later during specialization preparation after digesting the number of existing games.

  According to such an additional specialized stock lottery A using the [ART5] additional specialized stock lottery A table, whether to shift to RUSH and the type of PTR (PTR1 to PTR3) are determined in advance. Based on the determination result, it is possible to shift from ARTLv5 to RUSH, or from specialization preparation to any of PTR1 to PTR3.

<[ART5] Specialized stock lottery B table added>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66, the [ART5] specialization stock lottery B table added will be described. As shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, the [ART5] additional specialized stock lottery B table is provided for each additional state (normal, high accuracy, ultra high accuracy) and each set value (settings 1 to 6). However, it may be a table common to all the added states, or may be a table common to the set values.

  [ART5] The extra specialized stock lottery B table is used for the extra special stock lottery B for activating “RUSH” or “PTR” when the above-mentioned extra lottery B is won in the PTRs 1 to 3. [ART5] Addition-specific stock lottery B table shows, for each set value (settings 1 to 6), the group role (losing, replaying, bell, watermelon, weak cherry) of the lottery group B shown in FIG. , Strong cherry, middle cherry, MB, SP lip, WSP lip, BB), lottery result (non-winning, “RUSH”, “PTR”), and lottery value corresponding to each of the reference object and lottery result doing. In the [ART5] additional specialized stock lottery B table, lottery values are defined so as to be won in the additional specialized stock lottery B mainly when the group roles “SP Lip” and “WSP Lip” are won. When “SP Rip” is won, “RUSH” is mainly stocked, and when “WSP Lip” is win, “PTR” is mainly stocked. For example, as shown in FIG. 64, in the case where the added state is “normal” and set to “1”, if the added lottery B is won at the time of SP rep win, the added specialized stock lottery B is executed, and 254/256 The probability is non-winning and the probability of 2/256 is “RUSH”, and “PTR” is not won. When “RUSH” is won, the game moves to RUSH without the precursor game being executed. When “WSP Rip” is won and “PTR” is won, the winning results are stocked, and after the number of existing games is digested, any of PTR 1 to 3 is determined by PTR type lottery described later during specialization preparation. After it is determined, the stocked PTR is activated.

  According to the additional specialized stock lottery B using the [ART5] additional specialized stock lottery B table, it is possible to stock the transition to RUSH and the activation of the PTR, and the stocked RUSH and PTR. Can be activated afterwards. The extra special stock lottery B is not executed in the BB (normal BB, special BB) or when “RUSH” stock already exists.

<[ALL] PTR type lottery table>
Next, the [ALL] PTR type lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The [ALL] PTR type lottery table is provided for each set value (settings 1 to 6), but may be a common table for each setting value.

  [ALL] The PTR type lottery table is used for the PTR type lottery for determining the types of PTR1 to PTR3 when the transition to PTR is determined (stock). The transition to PTR is decided (stock) when BB2 wins (stock number 1), red bar pattern in BB2 (special BB) is aligned (stock number 1), red in BB2 (special BB) There are triggers such as when the bar W symbols are aligned (stock number 2), when the red bar symbols in EXCZ are aligned (stock number 1), and when the PTR winning by the above-described specialized stock lottery A and B is performed (stock number 1).

  [ALL] The PTR type lottery table includes reference values (settings 1 to 6) to be referred to, types of PTRs (PTR1 to PTR3) to be lottery results, and lottery values corresponding to the reference objects and lottery results. It prescribes. For example, in the case of setting 1, in the PTR type lottery, PTR1 is determined with a probability of 192/256, PTR2 is determined with a probability of 46/256, and PTR3 is determined with a probability of 18/256. The PTRs 1 to 3 determined in this way are activated after special preparation.

<[Normal, CZ] ART grade lottery table>
Next, the [normal, CZ] ART grade lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. [Normal, CZ] ART grade lottery tables are provided for each of “CZ”, “direct hit”, and “BB2” as shown in FIG. In addition, the [normal, CZ] ART grade lottery table is provided for each set value (settings 1 to 6), but may be a common table for each setting value.

  [Normal, CZ] The ART grade lottery table is used for ART grade lottery for determining a grade (grades A to C) at the time of ART winning. Specifically, when the ART winning lottery in the final game ART lottery or the final game revival lottery of the 14th CZ game is won, the ART grade lottery table (CZ) is referred to. If you win an ART according to the middle cherries in the middle, if the number of ceiling games is reached, the ART grade lottery table (direct hit) is referenced. If you win BB2 other than during ART, the ART grade lottery table ( BB2) is referred to, and ART grade lottery is executed using each table. Note that the grade cannot be rewritten even if BB2 is won during ART.

  [Normal, CZ] The ART grade lottery table is a set value (settings 1 to 6) to be a reference object, an ART grade (grade A to C) to be a lottery result, a lottery corresponding to each of the reference object and the lottery result. Value. For example, if the final game ART lottery of the 14th CZ game is an ART win in the case of setting 1, setting 1 of the [normal, CZ] ART grade lottery table (CZ) is referred to, and in the ART grade lottery, 196/256 Grade A is determined with the probability of, Grade B is determined with the probability of 52/256, and Grade C is determined with the probability of 8/256. The grades A to C determined in this way are used for a loop rate lottery described later, and as a result, the winning probability of the loop lottery described later is changed.

<[Normal, ART5] Predictor game number lottery table>
Next, the [usual, ART5] precursor game number lottery table (setting 1) will be described with reference to FIG. For the sake of convenience, only the table related to setting 1 is shown in FIG. 69 as the [usual, ART5] precursor game number lottery table, but it may be a table with different contents for each setting value, or one common to each setting value. It may be a table.

  [Usually, ART5] The sign game number lottery table is a CZ lottery by CZ lottery, an ART lottery by ART lottery, or a RUSH winner by extra special stock lottery. ART, RUSH) is used for lottery game number lottery for determining the number of CZ precursors or ART precursors or RUSH precursors. Note that CZ and RUSH may be stocked, and if there is stock after the end of CZ or after the end of RUSH, the sign game number lottery will be performed again, and the stocked CZ or RUSH will be released through the sign game There is a case. In addition, as for the priority of activation, the game with the ART warning is given priority over the game with the CZ warning. For example, if there is an ART win during the execution of the CZ precursor game, the number of ART precursor games is rewritten. Furthermore, when there is a BB win while the precursor game is being executed, the precursor game number lottery is performed again after the end of the BB.

  [Normal, ART5] The sign game number lottery table is the reference lottery timing (at the time of CZ win, at the time of CZ, RUSH stock release, at the time of ART win, at the time of win specialization (RUSH) win) and the sign of the lottery result The number of games (0 to 8) and the lottery value corresponding to each of the reference object and the lottery result are defined. For example, in the case of CZ winning, the number of CZ precursor games is not determined as “0”, the number of precursor games is determined as “1” with a probability of 10/256, and the number of CZ precursor games is determined with a probability of 162/256. The number is determined to be '2', the number of CZ precursor games is determined to be '3' with a probability of 20/256, the number of CZ precursor games is determined to be '4' with a probability of 1/256, and the probability of 1/256 The number of CZ precursor games is determined to be '5', the number of CZ precursor games is determined to be '6' with a probability of 1/256, the number of CZ precursor games is determined to be '7' with a probability of 16/256, 45 The number of CZ precursor games is determined to be “8” with a probability of / 256. Based on the number of precursor games determined in this way, the precursor game suggesting the shift to CZ, ART, or RUSH is executed in the normal state, CZ, or ART5 (ARTLv5).

<[ART2,5] Loop rate lottery table>
Next, the [ART2, 5] loop rate lottery table (setting 1) will be described with reference to FIG. For the sake of convenience, only the table relating to setting 1 is shown in FIG. 70 as the [ART2, 5] loop rate lottery table, but it may be a table having different contents for each setting value, or one table common to each setting value. It is good.

  The [ART 2, 5] loop rate lottery table is used for loop rate lottery for determining a loop rate for changing a loop lottery winning probability (continuation probability) described later. The loop rate lottery is executed when the ARTLv2 transition or the RUSH transition. The [ART2, 5] loop rate lottery table corresponds to the ART grade (grades A to C, RUSH) to be referred to, the loop rate (A to D) to be the lottery result, the reference subject and the lottery result. The lottery value is specified. For example, in the case of grade A, the loop rate A is determined with a probability of 221/256, the loop rate B is determined with a probability of 30/256, the loop rate C is determined with a probability of 4/256, The loop rate D is determined by the probability. The higher the loop rate from A to D, the easier it is to win in the loop lottery described later. Based on the loop rate determined in this way, loop lottery is executed.

<[ART2,5] Loop lottery table>
Next, the [ART2, 5] loop lottery table (setting 1) will be described with reference to FIG. For the sake of convenience, only the table related to setting 1 is shown in FIG. 71 as the [ART2, 5] loop lottery table, but it may be a table having different contents for each setting value, or as one table common to each setting value. Also good.

  The [ART2, 5] loop lottery table is used for loop lottery for determining whether or not ARTLv2 and RUSH are continued beyond the prescribed number of games. Loop lottery is executed at the 3G of RUSH at the time of transition to ARTLv2, at the time of transition to RUSH. For example, when winning a loop lottery at the time of transition to ARTLv2, a loop flag is set as a winning result, and when ARTLv2 is digested by 20G of the prescribed number of games, it is set based on the loop flag if it is not won by level-up lottery The continuation of the minute will be activated. When winning by level up lottery or when continuation for one set is activated based on the winning result of loop lottery, the loop flag is discarded.

  [ART2, 5] The loop lottery table specifies the loop rate (A to D) to be referred to, the lottery result (non-winning.winning), and the lottery value corresponding to each of the reference target and the lottery result. Yes. For example, in the case of the loop rate A, it becomes non-winning with a probability of 255/256 and wins with a probability of 1/256. In other words, by winning the loop lottery, ARTLv2 or RUSH continues until the number of games obtained by adding one set to the prescribed number of games per set (20G, 3G) is consumed. In addition, the level that enters first in ART is, for example, ARTLv3, and when it is demoted from ARTLv3 at the time of this ART entry to ARTLv2 for the first time, it continues for one set by loop lottery based on the loop rate corresponding to the grade for that ARTLv2 In the same manner as above, when the demote is first demoted to ARTLv2, the loop guarantee count may be given by the loop guarantee count lottery to which the above-mentioned first grade common is applied. According to this, even if it is demoted to ARTLv2 without winning in the level-up lottery in ARTLv3, there is a possibility that continuation by loop lottery or the number of loop guarantees will be given in the ARTLv2, so once after entering the ART It is possible to effectively suppress the possibility of the so-called run-through that ends the ART without continuing.

<PTR reel lock lottery table>
Next, the reel lock lottery table (setting 1) during PTR will be described with reference to FIG. For convenience, only the table related to setting 1 is shown in FIG. 72 as the reel lock lottery table in PTR, but it may be a table having different contents for each setting value, or may be a table common to each setting value. .

  The reel lock lottery table during PTR is used for reel lock lottery for determining whether or not to perform reel lock (reel locks 1 and 2 during ART5) during ART5, when entering PTR, or when winning BB. The reel lock lottery is not executed during ART preparation, specialization preparation, PTR, RUSH, or BB (normal BB, special BB). The reel lock lottery wins the extra number of games in the extra lottery, and when the extra stock lottery is non-winning (at the extra lottery), or the extra lottery wins the extra number of games and specializes in the extra bonus It is executed in the case of winning in stock lottery (at the time of special winning). The reel lock lottery table during PTR corresponds to each of a reference target winning time (in the case of extra winning, special winning time), a lottery result (non-winning, one step, two stages), a reference target, and a lottery result. The lottery value is specified. The first stage corresponds to “Reel lock 1 during ART5” shown in FIG. 36, and the second stage corresponds to “Reel lock 2 during ART5”. For example, in the case of special winning, reel lock is not performed by non-winning with a probability of 224/256, and “reel lock 1 during ART5” is performed by winning one step with a probability of 16/256. , “Reel Lock 2 during ART5” is performed by winning in two stages with a probability of 16/256.

  The tables and table data shown in FIGS. 21 to 72 described above are stored in the main ROM 94, and are referred to when the main CPU 93 controls the game state and the ball appearance state. On the other hand, data of tables shown in FIGS. 73 to 94 described below is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76 and is referred to when the sub CPU 102 controls the effect state. 73 to 94 show various tables referred to in the chance zone (CZ, EXCZ) as an example. The table used in the production state other than the chance zone is also stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76 and is referred to when the production state of the sub CPU 102 is controlled. Are omitted for convenience.

<Confirmed CZ point distribution lottery table>
With reference to FIG. 73, the confirmed CZ point distribution lottery table will be described. Incidentally, (A) in the figure shows a confirmed CZ point distribution lottery table, and (B) in the figure shows a point correspondence relation table related to the table. In the confirmed CZ point distribution lottery table, when “determined CZ” is determined by the CZ type lottery, the meter display point is increased by adding a special CZ point to the meter display point described later in the middle game in CZ. Used for lottery determination CZ point distribution lottery. The determined CZ point distribution lottery table defines CZ points (none, 100, 200, 300, 400) that are lottery results, and lottery values corresponding to the lottery results.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (B), the above-described technique points (0 to 20) are managed by the main CPU 93 that controls the payout state, while being managed in terms of performance by the sub CPU 102 in relation to the technique points. In addition to the CZ points, there are battle points (0 to 400) and meter display points (0 to 500).

  The battle point (0 to 400) is a parameter corresponding to the technique point (0 to 20), and accumulates a predetermined numerical value given according to the content of the effect (enemy character defeat) that wins the enemy character on the effect. This is managed by the sub CPU 102 as a parameter for changing the display color of the meter. For example, the match points “0” to “99” correspond to the technique points “0” to “4”, the meter display color “blue”, and the match points “100” to “199” indicate the technique points “5” to “5”. The meter display color “yellow” corresponding to “9” and the battle points “200” to “299” correspond to the technique points “10” to “14”, and the meter display color “green” and the battle point “300”. ~ '399' is the meter display color "red" corresponding to the technique points '15' to '19', and the battle point '400' is the meter display color "rainbow" corresponding to the technique point '20'. . Note that the battle point is corrected to “400” as the upper limit value when it exceeds “400”. Further, the predetermined numerical value given as the battle point is determined in advance according to the contents of the enemy character defeat effect described later, such as the type of enemy character and the type and number of techniques to fight (not shown).

  The meter display point (0 to 500) is a numerical value that is actually displayed on the meter according to the battle point, and is set as a limit value for each battle point. As shown in FIG. 73 (B), for example, the battle points are “0” to “19”, “20” to “39”, “40” to “59”, “60” to “79”, “80”. In the case of “˜“ 99 ”, the meter display color is“ blue ”, and the meter display points are“ 35 ”,“ 50 ”,“ 65 ”,“ 80 ”,“ 85 ”based on the preset limit values. It is displayed as'. When the battle point reaches “400” (technical point “20”), the meter display color becomes “rainbow” and the meter display point is displayed as “500”.

  When the CZ point is added to such a meter display point by the determined CZ point sorting lottery, the meter display point becomes a numerical value raised by a numerical value of the addition from a preset limit value. The upper limit of the meter display point is set to “500”, and when the meter display point exceeds “500” by adding CZ points, the meter display point is corrected to the upper limit of “500”.

  In this way, the meter display color changes as the number of battle points increases by 100, and the meter display color changes as the number of meter display points increases by approximately 100. Here, with respect to the meter display point, when the CZ point is added, it becomes a numerical value greatly deviating from the battle point, and there is a situation in which the meter display color does not change although the meter display point increases dramatically. Become. Thereby, the player is given an impression that the change in the meter display color is stopped halfway. When the meter display point is displayed as “500”, the display color of the meter is “rainbow” having the highest expectation level, so that the expectation level for the ART transition is also increased.

  Specifically, in the point management by the sub CPU 102, when the CZ point (none, 100, 200, 300, 400) is determined by the determined CZ point distribution lottery, the meter display point of the CZ8G is determined. CZ points are added. Thereby, the meter display point after CZ point addition is displayed according to the CZ8G battle point. For example, in CZ8G, when the battle point is “80” to “99” and there is no CZ point addition, the meter display color is “blue”, and “85” is displayed as the meter display point. In the special case where the CZ point “100” is added, the meter display color remains “blue” as usual, while “185” is displayed as the meter display point. According to the CZ point allocation lottery using such a determined CZ point allocation lottery table, in the case of the determined CZ, an impression that the display color change of the meter is temporarily stopped can be given, and the meter display point can be changed. It can be greatly changed, and the degree of expectation for ART transition can be increased.

<CZ music lottery table>
The CZ music lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The CZ music lottery table is provided for each set value and the number of games, but may be a common table for each set value and the number of games. The CZ music lottery table is used for music lottery for selecting music to be reproduced during CZ. The CZ music lottery table refers to the number of CZ stocks to be referenced (none, 1, 2, 3 or more), the music that is the lottery result (normal CZ music, special CZ music), for each set value and number of games. The lottery value corresponding to each of the target and the lottery result is defined.

  The music lottery is executed when the special CZ music is not played back at the start of the CZ1G based on the confirmed CZ, or at the start of the CZ2-8G, and the number of technique points is 20. For example, in the case of setting 1 and at the start of CZ1G based on the confirmed CZ, if the number of CZ stock is 1, normal CZ music is selected with a probability of 13107/32768, and special CZ music is selected with a probability of 19661/32768 The selected music is played from the intro. In addition, when the number of technique points acquired is 20 at the start of the 2nd to 8th CZs, the special CZ music is selected with a probability of 9362/32768 regardless of the number of CZ stocks. If selected, the music is played from the intro.

  According to the music lottery using such a CZ music lottery table, when “determined CZ” is determined by the above-described CZ type lottery, there is a possibility that a special CZ music may be played at the start of the CZ1G eye, The degree of expectation for ART transition can be increased by the music to be played. Also, in CZ2-8G, if the skill point has reached the upper limit of 20, there is a possibility that special CZ music will be played, and expectation for ART transition by the final game ART lottery of CZ14G by the played music The degree can be raised.

<CZ production category lottery table>
The CZ effect category lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 75 to 77, the CZ effect category lottery table is provided for each of CZ1G, CZ2 to 10G, and CZ11G. Further, although the CZ effect category lottery table is provided for each predetermined number of difference points to be described later, FIGS. 76 and 77 show only tables corresponding to 0 to 4P difference points for convenience. The difference point corresponds to a numerical value obtained by subtracting the battle point from the meter display point. When the subtracted numerical value becomes a negative value, the difference point is corrected to 0 which is predetermined as the lower limit value. When such a difference point becomes large, the difference between the meter display point and the battle point is large. Also, the display color of the meter is always “blue” for CZ1G, and changes from “blue” → “yellow” → “green” → “red” → “rainbow” according to the number of skill points acquired. The CZ production category lottery tables for CZ2 to 10G and CZ11G shown in FIGS. 76 and 77 are provided so as to differ depending on the display color of the meter. The CZ effect category lottery table is provided as a table common to the settings 1 to 6, but may be a table having different contents for each set value.

  The CZ effect category lottery table is used for the effect category lottery for determining the effect category in the CZ. In the CZ effect category lottery table, the winning combination (losing, lip, batting order bell, common bell, MB1, MB2, watermelon, weak check, strong check, middle check, BB1, BB2) to be referred to, and the determination result A category (no effect, enemy character defeat A, enemy character defeat B, aura notice, frame flash notice, shutter notice) and lottery values corresponding to each of the reference object and lottery result are defined.

  The enemy character defeat A and enemy character defeat B are such that an effect display is performed in which a predetermined enemy character appears in the display area 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11 and the enemy character is defeated in the A pattern or the B pattern. . The aura notice is an effect display in which an aura appears on a main character that fights against an enemy character. The frame flash notice is an effect in which the frames of the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are blinked by LEDs. The shutter notice is an effect in which a shutter (not shown) performs a predetermined opening operation step by step. According to the CZ effect category lottery table, frame flash notices and shutter notices are likely to occur generally when a rare combination (watermelon, cherry) or special combination (BB1, BB2, MB1, MB2) is won.

  According to such an effect category lottery using the CZ effect category lottery table, the predetermined effect contents corresponding to the winning combination can be appropriately determined in the CZ1 to 11G, and the enemy character (boss character) is selected in the CZ14G. By defeating, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation for ART transition by the final game ART lottery.

<Competition point double lottery table>
With reference to FIG. 78, the battle point double lottery table will be described. The battle point doubling lottery table is provided so that the difference points are different between less than 100 and 100 or more, and are different between 2-8G and 9-11G.

  When the “Enemy Character Defeat A” or “Enemy Character Defeat B” is determined in the production category lottery using the CZ production category lottery table (2-10G, 11G), It is used for the battle point double lottery for deciding whether or not to double the battle points that can be acquired. The battle point doubling lottery table is a winning combination (loser, lip, batting order bell, common bell, MB1, MB2, watermelon, weak check, strong check, middle check, BB1, BB2) to be referenced, and a lottery result (etc.) And a lottery value corresponding to each of the reference object and the lottery result. For example, in 9 to 11G where the difference point is less than 100, when “Enemy character defeat A” or “Enemy character defeat B” is determined by watermelon winning, the corresponding battle point has a probability of 6554/32768, etc. Although doubled, it is doubled with a probability of 26214/32768.

  According to the battle point doubling lottery using such a battle point doubling lottery table, when the enemy character destruction effect is executed as the second half of the CZ or the difference point is relatively large, it is normal. As a result, when the difference between the battle point and the meter display point is large in the second half of the CZ, it is easy to produce an effect that reduces the difference. Can enhance the interest of

<CZ enemy character destruction A content lottery table>
With reference to FIG. 79, the CZ enemy character destruction A content lottery table will be described. It should be noted that the CZ enemy character defeat A content lottery table is provided so as to be different for each predetermined number of games, and is provided for each predetermined number of difference points. Only the table corresponding to the 2nd to 7th G in 0-4P is shown. In addition, a CZ enemy character defeat B content lottery table is also provided in the same manner as the CZ enemy character defeat A content lottery table shown in FIG. 79 and the like. To do. In addition, a CZ enemy character defeat A content lottery table and a CZ enemy character defeat B content lottery table which are applied when the battle points are doubled are also provided.

  The CZ enemy character defeat A content lottery table determines the production content when “Enemy character defeat A” is determined in the effect category lottery using the CZ production category lottery table (2-10G, 11G). It is used for enemy character defeat A content lottery. The CZ enemy character defeat A content lottery table is the winning combination (loser, lip, batting order bell, common bell, MB1, MB2, watermelon, weak cho, strong cho, middle cho, BB1, BB2) and lottery results And the lottery value corresponding to each of the reference object and the lottery result. For example, when the difference point is 0 to 4P on the 2nd to 7th G and BB1 is won and “Enemy Character Defeat A” is determined, the content of the “Enemy Character Defeat A” must be No. Twenty “4 enemy B defeating enemy characters” are determined. In addition, when the battle point doubling is determined by the battle point doubling lottery described above, the content of the effect is determined using a table corresponding thereto. Further, although not particularly illustrated, a battle point is associated with each effect content in advance, and when the content of the effect is determined, the corresponding battle point is added.

  According to the enemy character destruction content lottery table using such a CZ enemy character destruction content lottery table, the number of CZ digest games, the difference between the meter display point and the competition point (difference point), and the competition point are doubled. Depending on whether or not the enemy character is defeated, the contents of the effect can be determined in detail, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

<CZ aura acquisition lottery table>
The CZ aura acquisition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the CZ aura acquisition lottery table is provided so as to be different for each predetermined number of games and is provided for each predetermined number of difference points. However, in FIG. 80, for convenience, the difference points are 0 to 19P. Only tables corresponding to the 2nd to 7th G are shown in 20 to 39P and 40 to 59P.

  The CZ aura acquisition lottery table determines a battle point given in response to the “aura notice” determined by the effect category lottery using the CZ effect category lottery table (2-10G, 11G). Used for aura acquisition lottery. The CZ aura acquisition lottery table is the winning combination (losing, lip, batting order bell, common bell, MB1, MB2, watermelon, weak check, strong check, middle check, BB1, BB2) to be referred to and The points given as points (granting points: 0 to 200P) and lottery values corresponding to the reference objects and lottery results are defined. For example, if the difference point is 20 to 39P and the “Aura notice” is determined on the 2nd to 7th G, no matter which role is won, 20P is always given as a battle point when the aura notice is produced. In addition, the battle point given at the time of an aura notice is not doubled.

  According to the aura acquisition lottery using such a CZ aura acquisition lottery table, when the aura notice effect display is performed according to the number of CZ digested games and the difference (difference point) between the meter display point and the battle point It is possible to finely determine the battle points to be given to the game and to enhance the interest of the game.

<CZ aura content lottery table>
The CZ aura content lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, the CZ aura content lottery table is provided so as to be different for each battle point given in accordance with the aura notice described above.

  In the CZ aura content lottery table, “Aura notice” is determined by the effect category lottery using the CZ effect category lottery table (2-10G, 11G eyes), and the battle points to be given along with the aura notice are determined. In addition, it is used for aura content lottery for determining the content of the aura notice. The CZ aura content lottery table is a winning combination (losing, lip, batting order bell, common bell, MB1, MB2, watermelon, weak check, strong check, middle check, BB1, BB2) to be referred to, and a frame for a lottery result. The contents of the production related to the aura notice and the lottery value corresponding to each of the reference object and the lottery result are defined. For example, when the number of battle points given along with the aura notice is 20P or less, “special performance_point GET_small” is always determined as the production content of the aura notice regardless of which combination is won.

  According to the aura acquisition lottery using such a CZ aura content lottery table, it is possible to finely determine the content of the aura notice according to the battle points given along with the aura notice, and to enhance the interest of the game. it can.

<CZ production contents lottery (frame frame) table>
With reference to FIG. 82, the CZ effect content lottery (frame frame) table will be described. The CZ effect content lottery (frame hula) table is the content of the frame flash notice when the “frame flash notice” is determined by the effect category lottery using the CZ effect category lottery table (2-10G, 11G). It is used for the production content lottery for determining. The CZ production contents lottery (frame frame) table includes a winning combination (loser, lip, batting order bell, common bell, MB1, MB2, watermelon, weak check, strong check, middle check, BB1, BB2) to be referenced. The effect contents related to the frame flash notice as a result and the lottery value corresponding to each of the reference object and the lottery result are defined. For example, when a frame flash notice is determined by winning a watermelon, No. 4096/32768 is given. 7 “reel frame — 1 on small — purple” is determined, and the probability of 28672/32768 is No. Fifteen “reel frame_3 on small_purple” is determined.

  According to such an effect content lottery using the CZ effect content lottery (frame frame) table, the effect content of the frame flash notice can be determined in detail, and the fun of the game can be enhanced.

<CZ production contents lottery (shutter) table>
The CZ effect content lottery (shutter) table will be described with reference to FIG. The CZ effect content lottery (shutter) table determines the effect content of the shutter notice when the “shutter notice” is determined by the effect category lottery using the CZ effect category lottery table (2-10G, 11G). It is used for lottery production contents. The CZ effect content lottery (shutter) table includes the winning combination (losing, lip, batting order bell, common bell, MB1, MB2, watermelon, weak check, strong check, middle check, BB1, BB2) and the lottery result. The effect contents related to the shutter notice and the lottery value corresponding to each of the reference object and the lottery result are defined. As the contents of the effect related to the shutter notice, there is an effect operation in which a shutter (not shown) opens step by step. For example, an operation in which the shutter is opened up to the third step that is fully opened and the shutter is closed at a predetermined step can be executed. It is said. For example, when the shutter advance notice is determined by hitting a watermelon, No. 24576/32768 probability is obtained. 3 “Shut_DEF — 3on_CHANCE” is determined, and the probability of 8192/32768 is No.3. 5 of “Shut_DEF_1on red_CHANCE” is determined. A small window (not shown) formed of a liquid crystal panel or the like is provided behind the shutter, and an effect display is also performed on the small window in conjunction with the stepwise opening / closing operation of the shutter.

  According to the effect content lottery using such a CZ effect content lottery (shutter) table, the effect content of the shutter notice can be determined in detail, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

<CZ small window Kell lottery table>
The CZ small window kettle lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The CZ small window Kell lottery table is a small window for determining the contents of effects using a shutter and a small window (not shown) according to the contents of effects of the shutter notice in the 1st to 11th G in the CZ. Used for Kell lottery. The CZ small window Kell lottery table includes the shutter operation stages (0 to 3 stages) to be referred to, the production contents relating to the display of the small windows to be the lottery results, and lottery values corresponding to the reference objects and the lottery results. It stipulates. For example, in the case of a loss, when the shutter operation stage opens and closes in the first stage, “no effect” is determined as the small window effect content with a probability of 30208/32768, and the small window effect content with a probability of 2048/32768 "Notice: 1st stage_2on failure" is determined, and "Preliminary notice: 1st stage_3on failure" is determined as a small window effect with a probability of 512/32768.

  According to the small window kettle lottery using such a CZ small window kettle lottery table, the contents of the small window can be finely determined together with the stepwise opening / closing operation of the shutter at the time of losing or replaying. Can be increased.

<CZ enemy appearance lottery table>
The CZ enemy appearance lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The CZ enemy appearance lottery table is used for an enemy appearance lottery for determining a boss character (enemy character) to be an opponent in the 12th G of CZ. In the enemy appearance lottery, the number of replay wins (0 to 3 times) and the operation state of small windows (not shown) (small window operation stages 0 to 3 (fully open)) are referred to. The CZ enemy appearance lottery table stipulates the number of replay wins and small window operating states to be referred to, the contents of the rendering as the lottery result, and the lottery value corresponding to each of the reference target and the lottery result. For example, when the replay is won three times and the small window is in the 0 stage open state (fully closed state), “Month_Yellow: Enemy A” is determined as the enemy appearance effect content with a probability of 18432/32768, 12288 “Moon_Yellow: Enemy B” is determined as the enemy appearance effect content with the probability of / 32768, and “Month_Red: Enemy B” is determined as the enemy appearance effect content with the probability of 2048/32768. In the present embodiment, it is set so that the expected degree of ART transition is higher when “enemy B” appears than “enemy A”.

  According to the enemy appearance lottery using such a CZ enemy appearance lottery table, it is possible to determine the boss character (enemy character) that will be the final opponent in the CZ12G and the contents of the presentation at the time of appearance, and Can be increased.

<CZ battle technique decision lottery table>
The CZ battle technique determination lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. A CZ battle technique determination lottery table is provided for each display color of the meter (blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow). 86 shows only the CZ battle technique determination lottery table corresponding to the enemy character A for convenience, but a CZ battle technique determination lottery table corresponding to the enemy character B is also provided.

  The CZ battle technique determination lottery table is used for a battle technique determination lottery for determining a technique (no effect, techniques 1 to 5) to be delivered to the boss character (enemy character) in the 13th G in CZ. The CZ battle technique determination lottery table includes a technique rank or the like to be a reference object (technical ranks A to E, a confirmed CZ), a technique to be a lottery result (no production, techniques 1 to 5), a reference object, and a lottery result. The lottery value corresponding to is defined. For example, when the meter display color is “blue” and the skill rank is “D”, the type of battle technique to be played against the boss character is determined as “technique 1” with a probability of 32480/32768, and the battle with a probability of 288/32768 is determined. The type of technique is determined to be "Technology 2".

  According to such a battle skill determination lottery using the CZ battle skill determination lottery table, a technique corresponding to the meter display color and the skill rank is paid out to the boss character that finally appears, and the boss character is defeated to ART. It can raise the expectation that it may shift.

<CZ enemy judge lottery table>
The CZ enemy judge lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 87, only the CZ enemy judge lottery table corresponding to “Enemy A” and “Technique 1” is shown for convenience, but “Enemy A” and “Technology 2-5”, “Enemy B” and “Technique” are shown. A CZ enemy judge lottery table corresponding to “1-5” is also provided.

  The CZ enemy judge lottery table is used for the enemy judge lottery for mainly determining the battle result (success, failure) with the boss character (enemy character) in the 14th G as the final game of CZ. The CZ enemy judge lottery table corresponds to each of the ART lottery result (ART lose, per ART, per ART revival) as the reference target, the production contents indicating the success or failure as the lottery result, the reference target, and the lottery result. The lottery value is specified. When the ART lottery result is “ART lose”, the CZ stock number (ST) is also referred to. When the ART lottery result is “per ART”, the ART grade (grades A to C) is also referred to. Further, as the ART lottery result, “per ART revival” when winning in the final game revival lottery may be referred to.

  In the enemy judge lottery, for example, when “per ART” and the ART grade is “grade A”, the production content such as “success 1 button is successful” is determined with a probability of 24576/32768, and with the probability of 8192/32768 “ The production content such as “Skill 1 Successful Button Success” is determined.

  According to the enemy judge lottery using such a CZ enemy judge lottery table, the effect contents indicating the match result according to the number of CZ stocks and the ART grade are determined together with the ART winning result, and the boss character corresponding to the success or failure of the ART lottery is determined. Since the effects related to the match are executed, the interest of the game can be enhanced in the final game of CZ.

<CZ push button color lottery table>
The CZ push button color lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 88, only the CZ push button color lottery table corresponding to “enemy A” is shown for convenience, but a CZ push button color lottery table corresponding to “enemy B” is also provided.

  The CZ push button color lottery table is used for a push button color lottery for determining the emission color of the push button when a push button (selection button) (not shown) appears in the 14th G, which is the final game of CZ. The CZ push button color lottery table includes the determination result of the enemy judge lottery that is the reference target, the emission color (default, red, rainbow) of the push button that is the lottery result, and the lottery value corresponding to each of the reference target and the lottery result. It stipulates. For example, when “Skill 1 Button No Success” is determined by the enemy judge lottery, the display color of the push button is determined to be “default” with a probability of 16384/32768, and the display color of the push button is with a probability of 16384/32768. It is decided to be “red”.

  According to the push button color lottery using such a CZ push button color lottery table, the light emission color of the push button that suggests the result of the battle with the boss character is displayed on the CZ 14G. Can enhance the interest of

<EXCZ production category lottery table>
The EXCZ effect category lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The EXCZ effect category lottery table is provided for each game number (none, 3G, 5G, 7G) obtained by the game number addition lottery.

  The EXCZ effect category lottery table is used for effect category lottery for determining the effect category in each game of the final game from the first game of EXCZ. The EXCZ effect category lottery table is a winning combination (losing, maintenance lip (RT2 maintenance lip), RT2 transition lip, RT2 middle lip, red bar W lip, red bar S lip, red lip lip, batting order bell, common Bell, MB1, MB2, watermelon, weak check, strong check, middle check, BB1 + watermelon, BB1 + strong check, BB1 + middle check, BB2) and the effect category that results in lottery (no effect, aim cut-in, frame flash effect) And a lottery value corresponding to each of the reference object and the lottery result. Note that the “aiming cut-in” in the effect category is an effect that suggests reverse pressing to encourage winning of the ART transition combination (red bar W lip, red bar S lip).

  For example, when the number of games obtained by the game number addition lottery is “None”, the effect category lottery related to EXCZ is executed in each of the EXCZ games 1 to 10G. When winning a lip or red bar S lip, “aimed cut-in” is always determined as the effect category, and the process proceeds to ART.

  According to the effect category lottery using such an EXCZ effect category lottery table, it is possible to appropriately determine the predetermined effect contents according to the winning combination in each game in EXCZ. It is possible to promote the winning of the ART transition role by the “targeted cut-in” of the effect category that suggests reverse pressing, and the entertainment of the game can be enhanced.

<EXCZ aiming content lottery table>
The EXCZ aiming content lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The EXCZ aim content lottery table is used for the aim content lottery for determining the effect content when “target cut-in” is determined in the effect category lottery using the EXCZ effect category lottery table. The EXCZ aiming content lottery table is the winning target (losing, maintenance lip (RT2 maintenance lip), RT2 transition lip, RT2 middle lip, red bar W lip, red bar S lip, red lip lip, batting order bell, common Bell, MB1, MB2, watermelon, weak check, strong check, middle check, BB1 + watermelon, BB1 + strong check, BB1 + middle check, BB2), corresponding to the contents of the rendering, the reference object, and the lottery result The lottery value is specified. As for the contents of the production, the display of loss or ART after display of cut-in 1 (transformation), display of loss or ART after display of cut-in 2 (symbol grip), display of loss or ART after display of cut-in 3 (technique 5) There is a display.

  For example, when the “target cut-in” is determined by winning the red bar W lip or the red bar S lip, “ART” is displayed after the cut-in 1 to 3 are displayed as the production contents of the “target cut-in”. On the other hand, the content of the effect to be displayed is always determined. On the other hand, when the reddish lip is won, the content of the effect to display “lost” after the display of cut-in 1 or 2 is always determined, and the transition to ART is not made. Become.

  According to the aim content lottery using such an EXCZ target content lottery table, it is possible to appropriately determine the production content according to whether the ART is successful or not, and to enhance the interest of the game.

<EXCZ frame hula content lottery table>
With reference to FIG. 91, the EXCZ frame hula content lottery table will be described. The EXCZ effect category lottery table is provided for each game number (none, 3G, 5G, 7G) obtained by the game number addition lottery. FIG. 91 shows a game obtained by the game number addition lottery. Only the table corresponding to the number “None” is shown.

  The EXCZ frame hula content lottery table is used as a frame hula content lottery for determining the production content when the “frame flash production” is decided by the production category lottery using the EXCZ production category lottery table. The EXCZ frame hula content lottery table is a winning combination (loss, maintenance lip (RT2 maintenance lip), RT2 transition lip, RT2 middle lip, red bar W lip, red bar S lip, red lip lip, batting order bell, Common bell, MB1, MB2, watermelon, weak check, strong check, middle check, BB1 + watermelon, BB1 + strong check, BB1 + middle check, BB2), effects related to the frame flash effect resulting in lottery results, reference objects and lotteries The lottery value corresponding to each result is defined. For example, when a frame flash effect is determined by winning a watermelon alone, the probability of 24576/32768 is No. No. 1 “reel frame_Rst small_white” is determined, and No. 8 is a probability of 8192/32768. 6 “reel frame_Rst small_purple” is determined.

  According to the frame frame content lottery using such an EXCZ frame frame content lottery table, the content of the frame flash effect generated during the EXCZ can be determined in detail, and the fun of the game can be enhanced. Note that the frame flash effect in the final game of EXCZ may be executed simultaneously with the final turn effect described later. In the case of a loss in the final game of EXCZ, the frame flash effect is executed with a state in which BGM fades out.

<EXCZ final roll lottery table>
With reference to FIG. 92, the EXCZ final turn lottery table will be described. The EXCZ final turn lottery table is provided for each number of games (none, 3G, 5G, 7G) obtained by the game number addition lottery.

  The EXCZ final turn lottery table is used for the final turn lottery for determining the contents of the effect display that beats per ART or per ART revival in the final game according to the number of games to which EXCZ is added. The EXCZ final roll lottery table is the winning combination (losing, maintenance lip (RT2 maintenance lip), RT2 transition lip, RT2 middle lip, red bar W lip, red bar S lip, red lip lip, batting order bell, common Bell, MB1, MB2, watermelon, weak check, strong check, middle check, BB1 + watermelon, BB1 + strong check, BB1 + middle check, BB2), corresponding to the contents of the rendering, the reference object, and the lottery result The lottery value is specified. The contents of the production include: no production, 1 dimming, 2 dimming (revival), 3 dimming (revival), and 3 dimming (end).

  According to the final turning lottery using such an EXCZ final turning lottery table, it is possible to produce an effect that increases the degree of expectation of ART entry in the final game of EXCZ. In addition, there is a case where an effect (swinging effect) that beats the ART in the final game of EXCZ is executed simultaneously with the frame flash effect. In the case of a loss in the final game of EXCZ, the roaring effect is executed with a state in which BGM fades out.

<EXCZ Navi type lottery table>
The EXCZ navigation type lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The EXCZ navigation type lottery table is referred to when the sub CPU 102 receives a command instructing the pressing order from the main CPU 93 during EXCZ, and is used for the navigation type lottery for determining the type of navigation effect by the control of the sub CPU 102. . The EXCZ Navi type lottery table is a winning combination (losing, maintenance lip (RT2 maintenance lip), RT2 transition lip, RT2 middle lip, red bar W lip, red bar S lip, red lip lip, batting order bell, common Bell, MB1, MB2, watermelon, weak check, strong check, middle check, BB1 + watermelon, BB1 + strong check, BB1 + middle check, BB2), the navigation type in EXCZ that is the lottery result, the reference object, and the lottery result The lottery value corresponding to is defined.

  According to the navigation type lottery using such an EXCZ navigation type lottery table, the type of navigation instruction controlled by the main CPU 93 can be appropriately determined even during EXCZ.

<EXCZ pseudo navigation push order lottery table>
The EXCZ pseudo navigation push order lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The EXCZ pseudo navigation push order lottery is a pseudo navigation push order lottery for determining the push order notification contents by the liquid crystal display device 11 when a navigation type other than “no navigation” is determined by the navigation type lottery during EXCZ. Used. The EXCZ pseudo-navigation push order lottery table is a winning combination (loss, maintenance lip (RT2 maintenance lip), RT2 transition lip, RT2 middle lip, red bar W lip, red bar S lip, red lip lip, batting order bell , Common bell, MB1, MB2, watermelon, weak check, strong check, middle check, BB1 + watermelon, BB1 + strong check, BB1 + middle check, BB2), the type of push order notification content that results in lottery, reference object and lottery The lottery value corresponding to each result is defined.

  According to the pseudo navigation push order lottery using such an EXCZ pseudo navigation push order lottery table, for example, at the time of winning a maintenance lip (RT2 maintenance lip), the push order notification content which becomes a push order correct answer with a probability of approximately 1/3 According to the display on the liquid crystal display device 11 based on the push order notification content, RT2 is maintained, while the push order notification content that causes the push order failure with a probability of approximately 2/3 is determined and followed. There is also a possibility of shifting to RT0. That is, according to the pseudo navigation push order lottery, the stop operation according to the determined push order notification content does not necessarily become the correct push order answer, it is possible to maintain RT2 without following the push order notification, Since there is a case where the process proceeds to RT0 even if the push order notification is made, the push order notification by the pseudo sub CPU 102 different from the navigation instruction by the main CPU 93 in the true ART can be realized.

<Processing executed in a pachislot machine>
Next, processing executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 and the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Main control processing by control of main CPU>
With reference to FIG. 95, main control processing executed by the main CPU 93 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 95, when the power is turned on to the pachislot machine 1, main control processing is executed, and the main CPU 93 performs initialization processing at power-on (S1). In this process, it is determined whether backup has been performed normally or setting has been changed appropriately, and initialization of the memory area, device, etc. is performed according to the determination result.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process at the end of the unit game (game) (S2). In this process, data in various designated storage areas in the main RAM 95 is cleared. The designated storage area is a storage area that needs to be erased for each unit game (game) such as an internal winning combination storage area or a display combination storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S3). In this processing, input of the medal sensor 46 and the start switch 64 is checked.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs an internal lottery process (S4). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to an internal lottery table (see FIG. 28 and FIG. 29) according to the set value and the gaming state, and determines an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations by lottery by random number extraction. In the internal lottery process of S4, when BB1 is determined as an internal winning combination, the main CPU 93 sets data corresponding to the carryover combination storing area of the main RAM 95 and turns on the RT4 flag as a flag indicating the gaming state. The game state is set to RT4 (BB1) and the process is executed. When BB2 is determined as an internal winning combination, the main CPU 93 sets data corresponding to the carryover combination storage area of the main RAM 95, sets the RT5 flag to ON as a flag indicating the gaming state, and sets the gaming state. The process is executed as RT5 (BB2). The RT4 flag and the RT5 flag are turned on until the data in the carryover combination storage area is cleared, that is, until the symbol combinations related to BB1 and BB2 are displayed, and the symbol combinations related to BB1 and BB2 are displayed. When the data in the carryover combination storage area is cleared by this, it is set to off.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets a winning combination command corresponding to the internal winning combination in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95 (S5). The winning combination command is transmitted to the sub-control board 42 together with other commands by a start time command transmission process, which will be described later, and is also used as an argument in a game lock control process, a ball appearance state control process, etc., which will be described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a game lock control process (S6). In this process, BB2 freeze 1 (see FIG. 36) is generated when BB2 winning is made other than ART5 or during ART preparation, based on a flag indicating a paying condition (a paying condition flag) and a winning combination command. BB2 freeze 2 (see FIG. 36) is generated when BB2 win is found except during the ART preparation. In the game lock control process, a game lock (see FIG. 36) related to BB1 end or BB2 end should be executed in the next unit game in a BB end time process (see S192 in FIG. 105) described later. Even when the flag is set, the game lock is generated based on the flag. In other cases, the main CPU 93 skips the process of S6 and executes the next process. Note that the same process as the game lock control process of S6 may be executed in various start-time processes (see FIG. 96) of the payout state control process described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a payout state control process (S7). In this process, various processes related to the appearance state are executed. This process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs main-side navigation instruction control processing (S8). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is ART based on the appearance ball status flag. If it is ART, a command including a navigation number (see FIG. 31) corresponding to a winning combination is stored in the main RAM 95. Set to a predetermined area. The command including the navigation number is transmitted to the sub control board 42 together with other commands by a start command transmission process described later, and used in a sub side navigation effect control process (refer to FIG. 112) described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop initial setting process (S9). In this process, the reel stop control pattern used for the stop control of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is determined according to the winning combination and the gaming state. The reel stop control pattern is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95 and used in a reel stop control process (see FIG. 104) described later. This process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a start command transmission process (S10). In this process, various commands set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95 at the start of the unit game are transmitted to the sub control board 42. Note that commands sent at the start include a winning combination command and a navigation command, as well as a command indicating the appearance status.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel rotation start process after performing a so-called wait process (S11). In this process, rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started. When all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R start to rotate, an interrupt process is executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec), so that each reel 3L, 3C, 3R accelerates until its rotational speed reaches a predetermined speed. Then, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are controlled so that a predetermined speed is maintained.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop control process (S12). In this process, based on the reel stop control pattern determined in S9, the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R corresponding to the timing when the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R are respectively pressed. The rotation is controlled to stop. The reel stop control pattern defines the priority order of stop symbols according to the pressing order of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R. According to the reel stop control pattern, the same symbol position for the same winning combination Even if the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are pressed at the timing, the stop control is performed so that the stop symbols are different if the pressing order is different. This process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a winning determination medal payout process (S13). In this process, as a result of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R being stopped, a bonus according to the combination of symbols, such as the payout of medals and the operation of replaying, is given based on the combination of symbols displayed along the winning determination line. The operation for giving is controlled.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a winning operation command transmission process (S14). In this process, a winning action command corresponding to the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state is generated, and this winning action command is transmitted to the sub-control board 42. The winning action command includes various types of information indicating combinations of symbols displayed along the winning determination line.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a BB check process (S15). In this process, the operation and termination of BB1 or BB2 as a gaming state and a ball-out state are controlled based on the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state. This process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs MB check processing (S16). In this process, the operation and termination of MB1 or MB2 as the gaming state are controlled based on the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state. This process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs RT check processing (S17). In this process, control is performed to shift RT as a gaming state based on the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed. This process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a payout state check process (S18). In this process, control is performed to shift the appearance state based on the winning combination (group combination) determined in S4, the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed, and the like. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 returns to the process of S2. The payout state check process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

<Out of ball state control processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the ball appearance state control process will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 96, in the ball appearance state control process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is normal (during normal state) based on the ball appearance state flag (S20). If it is normal (S20: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S21. If it is not normal (S20: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S22.

  In S21, the main CPU 93 performs a normal start process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the appearance state control process.

  In S <b> 22, the main CPU 93 determines whether the CZ is in progress based on the ball status flag. If it is during CZ (S22: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S23. If it is not during CZ (S22: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S24.

  In S23, the main CPU 93 performs a start process during CZ. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the appearance state control process.

  In S <b> 24, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not EXCZ is in progress based on the appearing ball status flag. If it is during EXCZ (S24: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S25. If the EXCZ is not being performed (S24: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S26.

  In S25, the main CPU 93 performs a start time process during EXCZ. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the appearance state control process.

  In S <b> 26, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART is in progress based on the ball status flag. If it is during ART (S26: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S27. When the ART is not in progress (S26: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S28.

  In S27, the main CPU 93 performs a start time process during ART. This process will be described later with reference to FIGS. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the appearance state control process.

  In S28, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART is being prepared based on the appearance status flag. If the ART is being prepared (S28: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S29. If the ART is not being prepared (S28: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S30.

  In S29, the main CPU 93 performs a start time process during ART preparation. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the appearance state control process.

  In S <b> 30, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the normal BB is in progress based on the ball status flag. If it is during normal BB (S30: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S31. When the BB is not currently in progress (S30: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S32.

  In S31, the main CPU 93 performs a start-time process during BB1 (normal BB). In this processing, processing such as counting the number of games required at the start of a unit game during operation of BB1 (normal BB) or checking a flag is performed. In this process, an extra lottery B or an ART lottery regarding the number of ART games is performed based on the group combination. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the appearance state control process.

  In S32, the main CPU 93 performs a start time process during BB2 (special BB). In this processing, processing such as counting the number of games required at the start of a unit game during the operation of BB2 (special BB) or checking a flag is performed. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the appearance state control process.

<Normal start processing>
Next, normal start processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 97, in the normal start process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of games between ART is 1000G or more (S40). The number of games between ARTs is the number of games counted by the main CPU 93 from the end of ART until the next winning of ART or BB. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of games between ARTs is set to 1000G, and it is determined whether the number of games between ARTs has reached the number of ceiling games. When the number of games between ART is 1000G or more (S40: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S52. When the number of games between ART is less than 1000G (S40: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S41.

  In S41, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the winning combination is BB (BB1 or BB2) based on the winning combination. If the BB is won (S41: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S45. When the BB is not won (S41: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S42.

  In S <b> 42, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the middle stage cherry win in the MB is based on the game state flag and the winning combination. If it is a middle-tier cherry win in the MB (S42: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S45. If it is not the middle stage cherry winning in the MB (S42: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S43.

  In S43, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is a transition point of the CZ lottery state. The transition point of the CZ lottery state means a point in time when the counted number of games between ARTs applies to the period A, the period B, or the special period (see FIG. 40). When it is the time of transition to the CZ lottery state (S43: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S44. If it is not the transition point of the CZ lottery state (S43: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S45.

  In S44, the main CPU 93 performs CZ lottery state transition lottery processing. In this process, the CZ lottery state transition lottery is executed using the table of FIG. As a result, the CZ lottery state may shift to “LOW”, “MIDDLE”, or “HIGH”. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S45.

  In S45, the main CPU 93 performs an ISM mode transition lottery process. In this process, ISM mode transition lottery is executed based on the ISM mode and the winning combination (group combination) currently staying using the table of FIG. As a result, the ISM mode may shift to “normal”, “high accuracy”, or “super high accuracy”. The ISM mode after the transition is applied to the next game. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S46.

  In S46, the main CPU 93 performs an ISM acquisition lottery process. In this process, the ISM acquisition lottery is executed based on the ISM mode and the winning combination (group combination) currently staying using the table of FIG. This may result in ISM points. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S47.

  In S47, the main CPU 93 performs CZ lottery processing. In this process, CZ lottery is executed according to the CZ lottery state determined in S44 using the table of FIG. Thereby, there is a possibility that the payout state shifts from the normal state to CZ or EXCZ. The CZ lottery is not executed unless the ISM point is at least 1 or more. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S48.

  In S48, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the CZ winning is obtained as a result of the processing in S47. If it is CZ winning (S48: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S49. If it is not CZ winning (S48: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S50.

  In S49, the main CPU 93 performs a sign game number lottery process. In this process, the sign game number lottery that suggests the shift to CZ is executed at the time of CZ winning or CZ stock release using the sign game number lottery table of FIG. When the number of precursor games determined as the lottery result is digested, the game shifts to CZ or EXCZ. Note that the CZ lottery process of S47 is also performed during the CZ precursor, and if there are a plurality of CZ winnings before the CZ transition and stocked, the precursor game number lottery will be performed again after the end of CZ or ART and determined by this lottery. After the number of games played, the game moves to CZ or EXCZ again. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S50.

  In S50, the main CPU 93 performs an ART lottery process. In this process, the ART lottery is executed using the ART lottery table of FIG. Note that the ART lottery process in S50 satisfies the conditions that the ISM point is 0, the CZ lottery state is “HIGH”, the CZ omen or non-ART omen is present, and the bell is being won. Only executed if. According to such an ART lottery process in S50, there is a possibility that the payout state shifts from the normal state to ART2 (ARTLv2) without passing through CZ and EXCZ. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S51.

  In S51, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is ART winning based on the determination result of S41 and S42 in addition to the processing result of S50. The determination result of S41 and S42 is ART winning in the case of BB (BB1 or BB2) winning, or middle stage cherry winning in MB. In the case of ART winning (S51: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S52. If the ART is not winning (S51: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the normal start time process.

  In S52, the main CPU 93 performs an ART transition process. In this process, the number of precursor games before shifting to ART is set, or the number of games between ART is reset. The appearance state may shift from the normal state to ART2 (ARTLv2) through the number of precursor games set in this way. For example, when shifting to ART when the number of games between ART reaches 1000G, the number of precursor games of ART is set to 1G in the ART shifting process. In the ART transfer process, an ART grade lottery for determining an ART grade using the table of FIG. 68 is executed. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the normal start process.

<Processing at start during CZ>
Next, the start time process during CZ will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 98, in the start process during CZ, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of games between ART is 1000G or more (S60). When the number of games between ART is 1000G or more (S60: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S74. When the number of games between ART is less than 1000G (S60: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S61.
(S60).

  In S61, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the winning combination is BB (BB1 or BB2) based on the winning combination. If the BB is won (S61: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S74. When the BB is not won (S61: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S62.

  In S62, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the middle stage cherry winning in the MB in the ART precursor is based on the game state flag and the winning combination. When the middle cherry win in the MB is reached (S62: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S74. If it is not the middle stage cherry winning in the MB (S62: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S63.

  In S63, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the appearance state is the first game of CZ. If it is the first game of CZ (S63: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S64. If it is not the first game of CZ (S63: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S68.

  In S64, the main CPU 93 performs a game lock process when CZ is activated. According to this process, a game lock is generated when the 1G start of CZ (see FIG. 36). When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S65.

  In S65, the main CPU 93 performs CZ type lottery processing. In this process, based on the CZ lottery state using the table shown in FIG. 43, the ART shift is performed until the ART shift is confirmed and the CZ effect is performed, or the final game ART lottery process in S72 described later. CZ type lottery for determining “normal CZ” in which a normal performance is performed without being fixed is executed. When “confirmed CZ” is determined as the lottery result, ART winning is forcibly performed in the final game ART lottery process of S72. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S66.

  In S66, the main CPU 93 performs a boss lottery process. In this process, a condition for causing a specific boss character (specific boss) to appear in the CZ14G using the table of FIG. 44 (the number of wins of the group role “replay” in the CZ2 to 11G eyes (replay winning count) 3 to 0 times A boss lottery is performed to determine (). For example, when “3 times” is determined as the lottery result, if the number of CZ2 to 11G replay wins is 3 or more, the appearance of a specific boss character (specific boss) is confirmed, and CZ2 to 11G replay wins are determined. If the number is less than 3, a normal boss character (normal boss) appears. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S67.

  In S67, the main CPU 93 performs a technique point lottery process. In this process, a technique point lottery for determining a technique point based on the group combination using the table of FIG. 45 is executed. The skill points are accumulated from CZ1 to 13G and are used as parameters for determining the skill ranks A to E. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S68.

  In S <b> 68, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the appearance state is one of the 2nd to 13th games of CZ. When it is one of the 2nd to 13th games of CZ (S68: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S69. If it is not any of the 2nd to 13th games of CZ (S68: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S70.

  In S69, the main CPU 93 performs technique point lottery processing in the same manner as in S67. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S70.

  In S70, the main CPU 93 performs a final game ART lottery process. In this process, using the table of FIG. 46 at the start of the CZ14G, whether or not to shift to ART based on the boss characters (normal boss, specific boss) to appear and the skill ranks A to E according to the skill points up to the CZ13G A final game ART lottery is executed to determine whether or not. If “determined CZ” is determined in the process of S65, the final game ART lottery is forcibly determined as an ART win. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S71.

  In S71, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART win is based on the processing result in S70. If the ART is won (S71: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S74. If the ART is not winning (S71: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S72.

  In S72, the main CPU 93 performs final game restoration lottery processing. In this process, even if the result of S70 is not an ART win, the final game revival for determining whether to win an ART with a revival effect or the like based on the group role using the table of FIG. A lottery is executed. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S73.

  In S73, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART winning is based on the processing result of S72. When the ART is won (S73: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S74. If it is not the ART win (S73: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the start time process during CZ.

  In S74, the main CPU 93 performs an ART transition process. In this process, ART2 (ARTLv2) is set as a play state of the next game, or the number of games between ARTs is reset. In the ART transfer process, an ART grade lottery for determining an ART grade using the table of FIG. 68 is executed. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the start time process during CZ.

<Processing at the start during EXCZ>
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the processing at the start during EXCZ will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 99, in the start process during EXCZ, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of games between ART is 1000G or more (S80). When the number of games between ART is 1000G or more (S80: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S83. When the number of games between ART is less than 1000G (S80: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S81.

  In S81, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the BB (BB1 or BB2) is won based on the winning combination. If it is BB winning (S81: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S83. When the BB is not won (S81: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S82.

  In S <b> 82, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the middle stage cherry win in the MB is based on the game state flag and the winning combination. If it is a middle-tier cherry win in the MB (S82: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S83. If it is not the middle stage cherry winning in the MB (S82: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S84.

  In S83, the main CPU 93 performs ART transfer processing. In this process, ART4 (ARTLv4) is set as a play state of the next game, or the number of games between ARTs is reset. In the ART transfer process, an ART grade lottery for determining an ART grade using the table of FIG. 68 is executed. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the start time process during EXCZ.

  In S84, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the appearance state is the first game of EXCZ. When it is the first game of EXCZ (S84: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S85. If it is not the first game of EXCZ (S84: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S86.

  In S85, the main CPU 93 performs a game lock process when EXCZ is activated. According to this process, a game lock is generated at the start of EXCZ 1G (see FIG. 36). When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S86.

  In S86, the main CPU 93 performs a game number addition lottery process. In this process, a game number addition lottery is executed for determining the number of games to be added as the number of EXCZ games based on the group combination using the table of FIG. Thereby, in EXCZ, the number of games is extended according to the group combination. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the start time process during EXCZ.

<Processing during start during ART>
Next, with reference to FIG. 100 and FIG. 101, processing at the start during ART will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 100, in the start processing during ART, the main CPU 93 determines whether it is any of ART1 to ART4 based on the ball status flag (S90). If it is any of ART1 to ART4 (S90: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S91. If it is not any of ART1 to ART4 (S90: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S98.

  In S91, the main CPU 93 performs level-up lottery processing. In this process, a level-up lottery for determining promotion / demotion of ART1-4 based on the group role using the tables shown in FIGS. 49-53 corresponding to the ART level is executed. According to this process, the promotion destination / demotion destination after the predetermined number of games (20G, etc.) is consumed in each stage of ART1-4. If the promotion is determined twice or more before the predetermined number of games is consumed, the promotion will be promoted from the current ART level to two or more levels. The predetermined number of games is 40G or more when the game is continued by winning a lottery or a loop guaranteed number lottery. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S92.

  In S92, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a level-up win (promotion) is obtained as a result of the processing in S91. If it is a level up win (S92: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S93. If it is not a level-up win (S92: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S94.

  In S93, the main CPU 93 stocks information related to promotion until the predetermined number of games (20G or the like) is consumed. In addition, when there is information related to two or more promotions, information related to stock is deleted one by one for each promotion. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S94.

  In S94, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the start time of ART2 based on the appearance information. When it is time to start ART2 (S94: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S95. If it is not at the start of ART2 (S94: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S96.

  In S95, the main CPU 93 performs a lottery process related to the loop. In this process, the loop guaranteed lottery using the table of FIG. 54, the loop rate lottery using the table of FIG. 70, and the loop lottery using the table of FIG. 71 are executed. When a winning is finally obtained by loop lottery, the loop flag is set to ON. For example, even if it is not possible to promote until the specified number of games (20G) is digested in ARTLv2, if the loop flag is on, 20G for one set is further added and continues until ARTLv2 digests the 40th G It becomes. Also, even if the loop flag is not on and the game cannot be promoted until the specified number of games (20G) is consumed in ARTLv2, the number of games for one set or more will be awarded if the loop guarantee count is 1 or more. As a rule, ARTLv2 will continue until the number of games for the added set is consumed. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the start time process during ART.

  In S <b> 96, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the start time of ART <b> 4 based on the appearance information. When it is time to start ART4 (S96: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S97. If it is not at the start of ART2 (S96: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the start process during ART.

  In S97, the main CPU 93 performs a winning reward lottery process. In this process, a victory reward lottery is executed using the table of FIG. 55 in order to determine in advance the type of PTR as a victory reward for a battle effect in preparation for shifting to ARTLv5. In addition, when it is demoted in ART4 and does not shift to ART5, the effect of the content that becomes a victory in the battle effect is not executed, and the type of PTR determined by the winning reward lottery is discarded. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the start time process during ART.

  In S98, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the state is ART5 based on the payout information. If the state is ART5 (S98: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S99. If it is not in the ART5 state (S98: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S106 shown in FIG.

  In S99, the main CPU 93 performs an added state transition lottery process. In this process, an addition state transition lottery is executed to determine an addition state (usually high accuracy, very high accuracy) based on the group combination using the table of FIG. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S100.

  In S100, the main CPU 93 performs an extra lottery A process. In this process, an extra lottery A is executed to determine the extra game number lottery table (tables 1 to 7) shown in FIG. 62 based on a predetermined group combination or BB1 winning using the table of FIG. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S101.

  In S101, the main CPU 93 performs an extra game number lottery process. In this process, an extra game number lottery is executed to determine the extra game number in ART5 using the extra game number lottery table determined in the process of S100 (see FIG. 62). The number of additional games determined here is added as the number of ART5 games. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S102.

  In S <b> 102, the main CPU 93 performs an additional specialized stock lottery A process. In this process, when a winning result is obtained in the process of S100, an additional specialized stock lottery A for executing “RUSH” or “PTR” is executed based on the group role using the table of FIG. . When a winning result indicating that “RUSH” or “PTR” is activated is obtained, information corresponding to the winning result is stocked, and “RUSH” or “PTR” is stored based on the information stocked after the number of ART5 games is digested. ”And the stock information is deleted. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S103.

  In S103, the main CPU 93 performs a PTR type lottery process. In this process, a PTR type lottery for selecting one of PTR1 to PTR3 using the table of FIG. 67 is executed. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S104.

  In S104, the main CPU 93 performs a RUSH precursor game number lottery process. In this process, when information indicating that “RUSH” is to be activated is stocked as a processing result of S102, a precursor game number lottery that suggests a RUSH transition is executed using the precursor game number random determination table of FIG. When the number of precursor games determined as the lottery result is digested, the game moves to RUSH. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S105.

  In S105, the main CPU 93 performs a reel lock lottery process. In this process, when an additional game number lottery table (tables 1 to 7) is determined as a result of processing in S100, or “RUSH” or “PTR” is activated as a result of processing in S102. If the winning result is obtained, a reel lock is generated at the start of the game (see FIG. 36). When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the start time process during ART.

  As shown in FIG. 101, in S106, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is a special preparation based on the appearance status flag. If it is special preparation (S106: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S107. If it is not specialization preparation (S106: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S109.

  In S107, the main CPU 93 performs a PTR type lottery process. In this processing, information indicating that “PTR” is to be activated is stocked as a processing result of S102, and when “PTR” is to be activated based on this stocked information, PTR1 to PTR3 are used using the table of FIG. A PTR type lottery for selecting one of the above is executed during specialization preparation. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the start time process during ART.

  In S <b> 108, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the PTR is based on the appearance status flag. If it is PTR (S108: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S109. If it is not PTR (S108: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S114.

  In S109, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the winning of the group combination “replay” (replay winning) is continued ten times in the PTR2. When it is in PTR2 and it is a case where the replay winning is continued ten times (S109: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S110. When the replay winning in PTR2 does not correspond to 10 consecutive times (S109: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S111.

  In S110, the main CPU 93 performs a special addition lottery process. In this process, a special extra lottery for determining the extra game number lottery table (tables 1 to 7) shown in FIG. 62 using the table of FIG. 61 is executed. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S112.

  In S111, the main CPU 93 performs an extra lottery B process. In this process, when the winning combination corresponds to “SP Lip” or “WSP Lip” of the group combination, the extra game number lottery table (tables 1 to 7) shown in FIG. 62 is determined using the table of FIG. The extra lottery B is executed. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S112.

  In S112, the main CPU 93 performs an extra game number lottery process. In this process, an extra game number lottery is executed to determine the extra game number of ART5 during PTR using the extra game number lottery table (see FIG. 62) determined in S110 or S111. The number of added games determined here is added as the number of ART5 games after the end of PTR. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S113.

  In S113, the main CPU 93 performs a reel lock lottery process. In this process, when the player enters the PTR and the winning lottery B is added to S111, a reel lock (reel lock 1 in ART5) is generated at the start of the game (see FIG. 36). When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the start time process during ART.

  In S <b> 114, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is a RUSH start time based on the appearance status flag. When it is time to start RUSH (S114: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S115. When the RUSH is not started (S114: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S116.

  In S115, the main CPU 93 performs a loop determination process. In this process, the loop ratio lottery is executed using the table of FIG. 70, and the loop lottery is executed using the table of FIG. That is, at the start of RUSH, it is determined whether or not to execute a plurality of sets of effects related to RUSH of one set 3G. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S116.

  In S <b> 116, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the RUSH is being performed based on the appearance status flag. If it is during RUSH (S116: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S117. When the RUSH is not being executed (S116: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the start process during the ART.

  In S117, the main CPU 93 performs an extra lottery B process. In this process, similarly to the process of S111, when the winning combination corresponds to the “SP Lip” or “WSP Lip” of the group combination, the extra game number lottery table (Table 1) shown in FIG. ˜7) is added and lottery B is executed. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S118.

  In S118, the main CPU 93 performs an extra game number lottery process. In this process, an extra game number lottery is executed to determine the extra game number of ART5 during RUSH using the extra game number lottery table already determined in S100 of ART5. The number of added games determined here is added as the number of ART5 games after the end of RUSH. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the start time process during ART. Also in the 3G as the final game of RUSH, loop lottery is executed using the table of FIG. 71, and it is determined whether or not the effects relating to RUSH are executed as a continuous set.

<Processing at start during ART preparation>
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the start processing during ART preparation will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 102, in the start processing during ART preparation, the main CPU 93 performs an added state transition lottery process (S120). In this process, an added state transition lottery is executed to determine an added state (usually, highly accurate, very high accuracy) based on the winning combination using the table of FIG. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S121.

  In S121, the main CPU 93 performs an extra lottery A process. In this process, an extra lottery A is executed to determine the extra game number lottery table (tables 1 to 7) shown in FIG. 62 based on the group combination using the table of FIG. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S122.

  In S122, the main CPU 93 performs an extra game number lottery process. In this process, an extra game number lottery is executed to determine the extra game number in ART5 using the extra game number lottery table determined in the process of S121 (see FIG. 62). The number of added games determined here is added as the number of games at the start of ART5. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the start time process during ART preparation. In addition, in the start processing during the ART preparation, after winning BB1 during ART1-4, waiting for RT2 transition after BB1 is completed and shifting to ART1-4, level-up lottery is performed instead of extra lottery. If this level-up lottery is won, it will be shifted to the ART level that has been promoted by one step.

<Reel stop initial setting process>
Next, the reel stop initial setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 103, in the reel stop initial setting process, the main CPU 93 refers to the rotating stop initial setting table (not shown) and acquires the rotating stop number based on the winning combination or the like (S150). When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S151.

  In S151, the main CPU 93 acquires various types of information based on the number for stopping the spinning cylinder. In this process, for example, various types of information such as determination data for each pressing order associated with the rotating cylinder stop number are acquired. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S152.

  In S152, the main CPU 93 stores the rotating identifier in the symbol code storage area of the main RAM 95. That is, the main CPU 93 sets the bits of all symbol code storage areas (excluding unused areas) of the main RAM 95 to “1”. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S153.

  In S153, the main CPU 93 stores 3 in the stop button non-operation counter. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop initial setting process. The stop button non-operating counter is used for determining the number of stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R that are not stopped by the player, and is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95.

<Reel stop control process>
Next, the reel stop control process will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 104, in the reel stop control process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S160). If a valid stop button is pressed (S160: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S161. When the valid stop button is not pressed (S160: NO), the main CPU 93 repeatedly executes the process of S160 until the valid stop button is pressed.

  In S161, the main CPU 93 updates a pressing order storage area (not shown) and an operation stop button storage area (not shown) in the main RAM 95 in accordance with the pressed stop button. That is, the main CPU 93 updates the operation stop button storage area to manage the type of the stop button that has been pressed, and updates the press order storage area based on the type and order of the stop button that has been pressed. By doing so, the order of stop operations (push order, stroke order) is managed. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S162.

  In S162, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the stop button non-operating counter. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S163.

  In S163, the main CPU 93 determines a search target reel from the operation stop button. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S164.

  In S164, the main CPU 93 stores the stop start position in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95 based on the symbol counter. The stop start position is a symbol position corresponding to the symbol counter of the corresponding reel when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch board 65. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S165.

  In S165, the main CPU 93 performs a sliding piece number determination process. In this process, the number of sliding symbols defined at the stop start position is determined based on the reel stop control information (stop table group) selected based on the winning combination from the spinning stop initial setting table (not shown). . According to such processing, it is possible to make the symbols drawn into the predetermined stop position different according to the pressing order of the internal winning combination and the stop operation. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S166.

  In S166, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop command generation process. In this process, reel stop command data to be transmitted from the main control board 41 to the sub control board 42 is generated, and this reel stop command data is stored in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 95. The reel stop command data is data indicating the type of reel to be stopped, the stop start position, the number of sliding pieces (or the planned stop position), and the like. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S167.

  In S167, the main CPU 93 determines a planned stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces determination data, and stores this planned stop position in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95. The scheduled stop position is a symbol position obtained by adding any one of predetermined numerical values “0” to “4” corresponding to the number of sliding symbols to the stop start position, and is a symbol position at which the rotation of the reel stops. . When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S168.

  In S168, the main CPU 93 sets the scheduled stop position as a search symbol position in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S169.

  In S169, the main CPU 93 performs symbol code storage processing. In this process, the symbol code of the symbol position data for checking for checking the symbol position of the rotating reel is acquired. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S170.

  In S170, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol code storage area of the main RAM 95 based on the symbol code acquired in the process of S169. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S171.

  In S171, the main CPU 93 performs a control change process. In this process, the stop information group used for stopping the reel is updated when the stop position is at a specific stop position. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S172.

  In step S172, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the pressed stop button has been released. When the pressed stop button is released (S172: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S173. If the pressed stop button has not been released yet (S172: NO), the main CPU 93 repeatedly executes the process of S172 until the release is released.

  In S173, the main CPU 93 transmits a reel stop command. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S174.

  In S174, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is zero. When the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (S174: YES), the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop control process. When the stop button non-operation counter is not 0 (S174: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S175.

  In S175, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority storage process. In this process, the drawing priority order of all symbols on the rotating reels 3L, 3C, 3R is determined. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 returns to the process of S160. According to such a reel stop control process, the symbol or display constituting the display combination is made according to the internal winning combination and the pressing order of the stop operation, and further the stop operation timing so as to form the stop pattern shown in FIG. A symbol that does not constitute a winning combination is preferentially drawn into a predetermined stop position, and the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed along the winning determination line is changed.

<BB check processing>
Next, the BB check process will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106.

  As shown in FIG. 105, in the BB check process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not BB1 is in progress based on the gaming state flag (S180). If it is during BB1 (S180: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S181. If not in BB1 (S180: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S185.

  In S <b> 181, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the SP lip win (ART win) is reached. When the SP rip is won (S181: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S182. If the SP rip is not won (S181: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S183.

  In S182, the main CPU 93 performs ART-related processing (S). In this process, for example, if the destination after the end of BB1 is in the normal state, the ART winning is determined, and if the destination after the end of BB1 is ART5, the winning in the extra lottery is determined. For example, the winning (promotion) in the level-up lottery is confirmed. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S190.

  In S183, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the WSP Lip is won (ART winning). When the WSP Lip is won (S183: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S184. If it is not a WSP Lip winning (S183: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S190.

  In S184, the main CPU 93 performs ART-related processing (W). In this process, for example, if the transition destination after the end of BB1 is in the normal state, the ART winning (start from specialization preparation) is determined, and if the transition destination after the end of BB1 is ART5, the winning in the extra lottery is determined. In the case of ART1 to 4, winning in the level-up lottery (promotion until specialization preparation) is confirmed. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S190.

  In S185, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not BB2 is in progress based on the gaming state flag. If it is during BB2 (S185: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S186. If not in BB2 (S185: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S193 shown in FIG.

  In S186, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the SP lip is won. When the SP rip is won (S186: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S187. If the SP rip is not won (S186: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S188.

  In S187, the main CPU 93 performs a PTR stock process (S). In this process, for example, the number of stocks indicating the PTR transition confirmation is added as one time according to the winning of BB2, and in addition, as a result according to the winning of the SP lip until the end of BB2. Each time the corresponding symbol combination is displayed, the stock number is added as one time. As a result, the number of PTR stocks is added and updated. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S190.

  In S188, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the WSP Lip has been won. If the WSP Lip is winning (S188: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S189. If the WSP Lip is not won (S188: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S190.

  In S189, the main CPU 93 performs a PTR stock process (W). In this process, for example, the number of stocks indicating the PTR transition confirmation is added as one time according to the winning of BB2, and in addition to this, as a result according to the winning of WSP Lip until the end of BB2. Each time the corresponding symbol combination is displayed, the stock number is added twice. As a result, the number of PTR stocks is added and updated. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S190.

  In S190, the main CPU 93 subtracts the payout number corresponding to the winning result from the BB payout number counter based on the display result. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S191.

  In S191, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the BB payout number counter is less than zero. When the value of the BB payout number counter is less than 0 (S191: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S192. When the value of the BB payout number counter is not less than 0 but 0 or more (S191: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the BB check process.

  In S192, the main CPU 93 performs BB end processing. In this process, various processes required at the end of the BB are executed. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the BB check process.

  As shown in FIG. 106, in S193, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is a BB winning based on the display result. When it is a BB winning (S193: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S194. If it is not a BB prize (S193: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the BB check process.

  In S 194, the main CPU 93 sets the BB type in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S195.

  In S195, the main CPU 93 sets a predetermined value (351 in the present embodiment) in the BB payout number counter. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S196.

  In S196, the main CPU 93 performs BB start time processing. In this process, various processes required at the start of the BB are executed. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the BB check process. In the processes of S181, S183, S186, and S88, it is determined whether or not the SP lip or WSP lip is won. However, it may be determined whether or not these winning combinations are won.

<MB check processing>
Next, the MB check process will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 107, in the MB check process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is in the MB based on the gaming state flag (S200). When the MB is in progress (S200: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S201. When not in MB (S200: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S204.

  In S201, the main CPU 93 subtracts the payout number corresponding to the winning result from the MB payout number counter. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S202.

  In S202, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the MB payout number counter is less than zero. When the value of the MB payout number counter is less than 0 (S202: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S203. When the value of the payout number counter in MB is not less than 0 but 0 or more (S202: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the MB check process.

  In S203, the main CPU 93 performs MB end processing. In this process, various processes required at the end of the MB are executed. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the MB check process.

  In S204, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MB winning is based on the display result. If it is an MB prize (S204: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S205. If it is not an MB prize (S204: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the MB check process.

  In S <b> 205, the main CPU 93 sets the MB type in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S206.

  In S206, the main CPU 93 sets a predetermined value (9 or 36 in the present embodiment) in the MB payout number counter. At this time, when the MB type is MB1, 9 is set in the MB payout number counter, and when the MB type is MB2, 36 is set in the MB payout number counter. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S207.

  In S207, the main CPU 93 performs MB start time processing. In this process, various processes required at the start of MB are executed. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the MB check process.

<RT check processing>
Next, the RT check process will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 108, in the RT check process, the main CPU 93 determines whether RT0 is in progress based on the gaming state flag (S210). If it is during RT0 (S210: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S211. If it is not during RT0 (S210: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S213.

  In S211, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the bell spilled eyes are established based on the display result. If the bell spill is established (S211: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S212. When the bell spill is not established (S211: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process. Note that there is a high possibility that the bell spilled eyes will be established when the push order fails when there is no navigation effect when the push order bell is won.

  In S212, the main CPU 93 sets the RT1 flag on as the gaming state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process.

  In S213, the main CPU 93 determines whether RT1 is in progress based on the gaming state flag. If it is during RT1 (S213: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S214. If it is not during RT1 (S213: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S218.

  In S214, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the RT2 transition lip is won based on the display result. When the RT2 transition lip is won (S214: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S215. When the RT2 transition lip is not won (S214: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S216. In RT1, the RT2 transition lip is awarded when the push order is successful as long as the navigation instruction push order is followed. In other words, if no navigation instruction is given during RT1, it is difficult for RT2 transition lip to win and the possibility of winning RT0 transition lip increases.

  In S215, the main CPU 93 sets the RT2 flag on as the gaming state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process.

  In S216, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the RT0 transition lip is won based on the display result. When the winning is the RT0 transition lip (S216: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S217. When the RT0 transition lip is not won (S216: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process.

  In S217, the main CPU 93 sets the RT0 flag on as a gaming state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process.

  In S218, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is in RT2 based on the gaming state flag. If it is during RT2 (S218: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S219. If not in RT2 (S218: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process.

  In S219, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a bell spilled eye has been established. If the bell spill is established (S219: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S220. If the bell spill is not established (S219: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S221.

  In S220, the main CPU 93 sets the RT1 flag on as the gaming state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process.

  In S <b> 221, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the RT0 transition lip is won. When the winning is the RT0 shift lip (S221: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S222. If the winning is not RT0 transfer lip (S221: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process.

  In S222, the main CPU 93 sets the RT0 flag on as the gaming state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the RT check process.

<Out of ball status check processing>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 109 to 111, the payout state check process will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 109, in the payout state check process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is a BB1 winning based on the display result (S230). If it is a BB1 winning (S230: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S231. If it is not a BB1 winning (S230: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S232.

  In S231, the main CPU 93 sets the normal BB (BB1) as the ball appearance state flag. At this time, the appearance status flag before setting the normal BB is set as a transition destination when the normal BB is ended without the ART winning. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the appearance state check process.

  In S232, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the BB2 winning is based on the display result. When it is a BB2 winning (S232: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S233. If it is not a BB2 winning (S232: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S234.

  In S233, the main CPU 93 sets a special BB (BB2) as a payout state flag. At this time, in the case of a BB2 winning, the payout state flag before setting the special BB is reset because the ART shift is determined after the special BB ends. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the appearance state check process.

  In S234, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is in the normal state based on the appearance state flag. If it is in the normal state (S234: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S235. When not in the normal state (S234: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S243 shown in FIG.

  In S235, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART shift is determined in the normal start process described above. When the ART shift is determined (S235: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the process of S236. When the ART transition is not determined (S235: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S238.

  In S <b> 236, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the final game is an ART precursor. If the final game is an ART precursor (S236: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S237. If it is not the final game of the ART precursor (S236: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the appearance status check process.

  In S237, the main CPU 93 sets an ART corresponding to the lottery result or the like as the appearance status flag. Thereby, the effect which concerns on ART is performed as a game appearance state from the next game. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the appearance state check process.

  In S238, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the CZ shift is determined in the above-described normal start process. When the CZ transition is determined (S238: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S239. If the CZ transition has not been determined (S238: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the payout state check process.

  In S239, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the final game is a CZ precursor. If the final game is a CZ precursor (S239: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S240. When it is not the last game of CZ precursor (S239: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the payout state check process.

  In S240, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is RT2 based on the gaming state flag. If it is RT2 (S240: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S421. If it is not RT2 (S240: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S422.

  In S241, the main CPU 93 sets EXCZ as the appearance state flag. Thereby, the effect which concerns on EXCZ is performed as a game appearance state from the next game. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the appearance state check process.

  In S242, the main CPU 93 sets CZ as the appearance status flag. Thereby, the effect which concerns on CZ is performed as an appearance state from the next game. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the appearance state check process.

  As shown in FIG. 110, in S243, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the CZ is in progress based on the ball status flag. If it is during CZ (S243: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S244. If not in CZ (S243: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S248.

  In S244, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART shift is determined in the above-described start process during CZ. When the ART shift is determined (S244: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the process of S245. When the ART transition is not determined (S244: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S246.

  In S245, the main CPU 93 sets ART (ART2) as a ball-out state at the end of the CZ14G. As a result, when the CZ14G-th is finished in a state where the ART transition is confirmed, an effect related to ART2 (ARTLv2) is executed as a ball-out state from the next game. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the appearance state check process.

  In S246, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the final game of CZ. If it is the final game of CZ (S246: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S247. If it is not the final game of CZ (S246: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the payout state check process.

  In S247, the main CPU 93 sets the normal state as the payout state flag. As a result, when there is no ART winning and the CZ14G-th is finished, the effect related to the normal state is executed as the ball-out state from the next game. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the appearance state check process.

  In S248, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the EXCZ is in progress based on the appearance status flag. If it is during EXCZ (S248: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S249. When not in EXCZ (S248: NO), the main CPU 93 shifts to the process of S253 shown in FIG.

  In S249, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART shift is determined by the above-described EXCZ start process or the WSP / SP-lip winning determination. For example, if it is determined that WSP Lip or SP Lip has been won, ART transfer is determined. When the ART shift is determined (S249: YES), the main CPU 93 shifts to the process of S250. When the ART transition is not determined (S249: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S251.

  In S250, the main CPU 93 sets ART (ART4, special preparation) as a payout status flag. As a result, when the ART transition is determined according to the WSP lip or the SP lip win in EXCZ, an effect relating to ART4 (ARTLv4) or special preparation is executed as a play-out state from the next game. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the appearance state check process.

  In S251, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the final game of EXCZ. If it is the final game of EXCZ (S251: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S252. If it is not the final game of EXCZ (S251: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the payout state check process.

  In S252, the main CPU 93 sets the normal state as the appearance state flag. As a result, when the number of games obtained during EXCZ without the winning of WSP lip or SP lip is exhausted during EXCZ, the effect relating to the normal state is executed from the next game. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the appearance state check process.

  As shown in FIG. 111, in S253, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not ART1 to ART4 (ARTLv1 to ART4) are in progress based on the ball status flag. If it is during ART1-4 (S253: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S254. If not in ART1-4 (S253: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S256.

  In S254, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the final game of ART1-4. When it is the final game of ART1-4 (S254: YES), main CPU93 transfers to the process of S255. When it is not the final game of ART1-4 (S254: NO), main CPU93 complete | finishes the appearance state check process.

  In S255, the main CPU 93 sets the ART level after promotion / demotion (usually, ART1 to 4, special preparation) as the appearance status flag. If the above-mentioned level-up lottery is won during ART2, an effect that is demoted to ARTLv1 is executed as an effect of becoming ART3 internally, and the appearance status flag and effect set internally The ART level of the contents will be different. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the appearance state check process.

  In S256, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART 5 is in progress based on the appearance status flag. If it is during ART5 (S256: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S257. If not in ART5 (S256: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S259.

  In S257, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the final game of ART5. If it is the final game of ART5 (S257: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S258. If it is not the final game of ART5 (S257: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the payout state check process.

  In S <b> 258, the main CPU 93 sets a payout status flag based on the lottery result. For example, when the number of games of ART5 is digested without winning the extra special stock lottery A, the effect relating to the normal state is executed as the appearance state from the next game. In addition, when the number of games of ART5 is digested in the state of winning special stock lottery A with RUSH or PTR, the effects relating to RUSH or PTR1 to PTR1 to 3 are executed from the next game. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the appearance state check process.

  In S259, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the final game has been prepared for specialization. If it is the final game for specialization (S259: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S260. If it is not the final game of special preparation (S259: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S261.

  In S260, the main CPU 93 sets PTR (PTR1 to PTR3) as a payout state. As a result, the effects relating to PTR1 to PTR3 are executed from the next game as the ball-out state. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the appearance state check process.

  In S261, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the final game of PTR. If it is the final game of PTR (S261: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S262. If it is not the final game of PTR (S261: NO), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S263.

  In S262, the main CPU 93 sets ART5 as a payout state. Thereby, the effect which concerns on ARTLv5 is performed as a game appearance state from the next game. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the appearance state check process.

  In S263, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it was a RUSH final game. If it is the final game of RUSH (S263: YES), the main CPU 93 proceeds to the process of S264. If it is not the final game of RUSH (S263: NO), the appearance status check process is terminated.

  In S264, the main CPU 93 sets ART5 as a payout state. As a result, the effect related to ARTLv5 is executed again as a game-out state from the next game. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the appearance state check process.

<Sub-side navigation effect control process by sub CPU control>
Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the sub-side navigation effect control process executed by the sub CPU 102 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 112, in the sub-side navigation effect control process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a navigation command has been acquired from the main CPU 93 (S300). When the navigation command is acquired (S300: YES), the sub CPU 102 proceeds to the process of S301. When the navigation command has not been acquired (S300: NO), the sub CPU 102 proceeds to the process of S301.

  In S <b> 301, the sub CPU 102 sets navigation effect data corresponding to the navigation command according to the instruction from the main CPU 93. Thereby, for example, when the appearance state is ART, a navigation effect image instructing the pressing order is displayed in the display area 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11. When this process ends, the sub CPU 102 proceeds to the process of S304.

  In S302, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a pseudo-navigation push order lottery is performed using the table of FIG. 94 while the payout state is EXCZ, and the lottery is won. When the pseudo-navi push order lottery is won (S302: YES), the sub CPU 102 proceeds to the process of S303 as the pseudo-navigation winning. When the pseudo-navi push order lottery does not win (S302: NO), the sub CPU 102 proceeds to the process of S304.

  In S303, the sub CPU 102 sets navigation effect data corresponding to the pseudo navigation winning. Thereby, for example, even in the EXCZ where the appearance state is not in ART, a navigation effect image instructing the pressing order may be displayed in the display area 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11. When this process ends, the sub CPU 102 proceeds to the process of S304.

  In S <b> 304, the sub CPU 102 sets display data corresponding to the appearance state. As a result, for example, during CZ, when the enemy character is defeated, an effect that the numbers and display color of the meter display change is executed, and during EXCZ, a reverse pressing is suggested according to the winning combination of the ART. An effect that cut-in display is performed is performed, and in ART1 to 4, an effect that the ART level is promoted or demoted for each 20G digestion is performed. When this process ends, the sub CPU 102 ends the sub-side navigation effect control process.

<Various changes in the game state and the game appearance>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 113 to 115, various change modes in the gaming state and the ball appearance state will be described.

<Relationship between winning combination and symbol display mode in gaming state>
FIG. 113 shows the relationship between the winning combination and the symbol display mode in the gaming state. Note that the player may perform a stop operation so as to aim at the cherry display establishment of the left reel 3L as a guide for determining whether or not the inside of the BB. As a result, the player displays a cherry symbol corresponding to “weak cherry”, “strong cherry”, or “middle cherry” at the lower or middle position corresponding to the left reel 3L in the display window 4. Whether or not the inside of the BB is inside can be determined according to whether or not. In addition, even when the player plays a small role other than cherry, for example, when a watermelon is won, other symbols are stopped and displayed because the cherry slides when the left reel 3L is stopped. It can be detected that there is a possibility of winning a small combination that can be missed depending on the timing of the stop operation on the other reels 3C, 3R. A player who is familiar with this type of gaming machine often proceeds with a game such as a so-called DDT, which performs a stop operation aiming at such a cherry pattern. In such a manner of hitting, in RT0 to 2, when the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L, for example, at the timing when the cherry of the symbol number 9 is located in the middle stage, the replay of the symbol number 11 is substantially performed. Stops at the middle stage, and the bell 3 with the symbol number 12 is stopped and displayed in the middle stage only when the watermelon is won and the RT2 maintenance lip is won, and the symbols such as the loser and the bell are rarely stopped and displayed. Assuming that the game is advanced in this manner, for example, as shown in FIG. 113 (A), during RT0, when the RT0 lip is won, the RT0 The symbol combination (representing REP1 as an example) corresponding to is always displayed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 113 (B), during RT0 or RT2, there is no navigation effect at the time of hitting the push order bell, and if the stop operation is performed by the DDT method so as to aim at the establishment of cherry display If the reel is not pressed in accordance with the correct pressing order, the symbol combination corresponding to the bell spilled eye (HZR2 is shown as an example) is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (C), during RT1, when the RT2 transition lip is won, there is a push order notification by the control on the sub side, and the reels are pushed according to the push order in which the DDT is stopped and the answer is correct. When is pressed, a symbol combination (representing REP3 as an example) corresponding to the RT2 transition lip is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (D), during RT2, there is a navigation effect when the RT2 maintenance lip is won, and when the reel is pressed down in accordance with the correct pressing order by stopping DDT. The symbol combination corresponding to the RT2 maintenance lip (representing REP4 as an example) is displayed. The symbol combination of this RT2 maintenance lip becomes a display mode in which “lip” symbols are aligned along a cross-up line indicated by a virtual line that is symmetrical to the winning determination line (cross-down). Therefore, RT2 maintenance lip (REP4) is also called slip lip. The symbol combination corresponding to the RT2 maintenance lip shown in (D) of FIG. 113 is the symbol combination of “C_XD watermelon — 02” related to the small-sized watermelon (see FIG. 25)). In addition, for the middle reel 3C, in order to win a watermelon when the watermelon is won, it is necessary to stop and display the watermelon symbol in the middle stage. On the symbol arrangement, depending on the timing of the stop operation, the watermelon may be missed (Fig. 21). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 113 (D), when the same symbol row corresponding to the RT2 maintenance lip and the watermelon is stopped and displayed on the left reel 3L, the middle reel is used to aim at a watermelon that may be missed. For example, if the watermelon of symbol number 8 is stopped at the timing when it is positioned in the middle of 3C, the game is advanced so that the watermelon is not lost as much as possible even when the watermelon is won. You can win a prize.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 113E, for example, during RT2 in EXCZ, there is a case where the replay related to the red bar and the RT2 maintenance lip are duplicated (winning WSP lip or SP lip). In this case, there is a push order notification by the control on the sub side, and the reverse push is suggested by the interrupt display on the liquid crystal display device 11, and the reel is pushed down according to the push order in which the DDT is stopped and the reverse push is performed. In addition, the replay stop control related to the red bar has priority over the RT2 maintenance lip, and the symbol combination (REP6 is shown as an example) corresponding to the replay related to the red bar can be displayed according to the reel stop operation timing. There is sex. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to such a replay related to the red bar is not displayed in the EXCZ, only the replay related to the red bar is won, and the ART shifts to ART. Note that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay related to the red bar is also used as an opportunity to extend the number of games when displayed in PTR3.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (F), when a symbol combination (white 7, white 7, white 7) corresponding to the BB1 is displayed in the BB inside the BB according to the reel stop operation timing, BB1 is executed as a gaming state from the next game.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 113 (G), there is a possibility that the middle cherries will win in the inside of the BB. If the DDT driving method is followed at the time of winning, the middle There is a possibility that a symbol combination corresponding to cherry (NML4 is shown as an example) is displayed.

  That is, in the display window 4, a display mode that constitutes a RT0 middle lip may be displayed during RT0 in the left column region corresponding to the left reel 3L, while a display mode that constitutes an RT2 maintenance lip during RT2 May be displayed, and these display modes are displayed so as to be shifted by one symbol. Accordingly, the reel stop control pattern corresponding to the left reel 3L at the time of replay winning during RT0 partially overlaps the symbol group in which the display mode constituting the RT2 maintenance lip is located within the four frame range of the number of sliding symbols. It is possible to specify the display mode constituting the lip in RT0 for the group. In addition, the reel stop control pattern corresponding to the left reel 3L at the time of replay winning during RT2 is a symbol group that overlaps with the symbol group whose display mode constituting the lip during RT0 is located within the range of four sliding frames. On the other hand, the display mode constituting the RT2 maintenance lip can be specified. The reel stop control pattern corresponding to the left reel 3L inside the BB is the respective symbol group in which the display mode constituting the RT0 lip and the display mode constituting the RT2 maintenance lip are located within the range of four sliding frames. It is possible to specify a middle cherry for a symbol group that partially overlaps.

  According to such a symbol display mode, even in the normal state RT2 and not inside the BB, the player first stops the left reel 3L if there is no navigation effect, and the cherry symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle stage. The pressing operation may be performed at a possible timing. In such a case, as long as the answer is correct in the pushing order, the symbol combination corresponding to the RT2 maintenance lip as shown in FIG. 113D is displayed, and the fall from RT2 to RT0 can be minimized. In addition, even if the symbol that constitutes the RT0 transition lip due to a failure in the pressing order (replay symbol in the middle row) is displayed, the ISM mode transition lottery is performed at the time of replay winning, and the ISM that affects the transition from the normal state to the CZ Since there is a possibility that the mode is winning “ultra-high accuracy”, it is possible to raise the expectation for acquiring ISM points.

<Display mode of meter in CZ>
FIG. 114 shows a display mode of the meter in CZ. As shown in FIG. 114 (A), during CZ, a meter display point (showing “85” as an example) and a meter display color corresponding to the battle point, together with an image in which the main character and the enemy character battle each other. A meter M indicating (showing “blue” as an example) is displayed. The battle point is a numerical value managed internally according to the skill point, and the meter bar MB is basically displayed in a display color defined in advance according to the battle point (see FIG. 73B). The meter display point is a value displayed as a limit defined in advance according to the battle point, and the meter bar MB is displayed so as to indicate the length according to this value.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (B), for example, when the meter display point is 125 and exceeds 100, the length of the meter bar MB is once reset, and the numerical value exceeding 100 from the left end of the meter M that is the origin end. A meter bar MB corresponding to the length is displayed. At this time, the meter display color as the color of the meter bar MB changes from “blue” to “yellow”. Thus, basically, every time the meter display point exceeds 100, the length of the meter bar MB is reset, and the meter display color changes to a color with high expectation.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 114 (C), when the CZ point is added, for example, 100 from the state of FIG. 114 (A) by the determined CZ point sorting lottery during CZ, the meter display point becomes 185, and the length of the meter bar MB Is reset for a length corresponding to the meter display point. On the other hand, with respect to the meter display color, if the internally managed match points do not exceed 100, as shown in FIG. 114 (C), “blue” is not changed from “blue” to “yellow”. It is displayed as it is. As described above, the meter M displayed in the CZ may have different effects in the normal CZ and the confirmed CZ.

<Relationship between internal level and production during ART>
FIG. 115 shows the relationship between the internal level and the production contents during ART. As shown in FIG. 115 (A), at the time of the first transition to ART2, if there is no level-up win (promotion) in the first ART2, it is demoted from ARTLv2 to ARTLv1 after 20G digestion. In ARTLv1, for example, if there is a level-up win (promotion) before 20G digestion, an effect of returning to ARTLv2 again after 20G digestion is executed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 115 (B), when there is a level-up win (promotion) during the first transition to ART2, the transition to ART3 is performed internally after 20G digestion from ARTLv2. In spite of this, an effect display appears as if it was temporarily demoted to ARTLv1. In ARTLv1 (internally ART3), even if there is no level-up win (promotion) before 20G digestion, although the presentation display is apparently promoted from ARTLv1 to ARTLv2, internally, ART3 to ART2 Will be transferred to. As a result, in ARTL2, the ART level on production and the internally managed ART level again coincide with each other.

  As shown in FIG. 115 (C), when there is a level-up win (promotion) during the first transition to ART2, as in the case shown in FIG. 115 (B), ARTLv2 However, after the 20G digestion from the beginning, it will shift to ART3 internally, but it will appear as if it was temporarily demoted to ARTLv1. In ARTLv1 (internally, ART3), if there is a further level-up win (promotion) before 20G digestion, an effect display that is apparently promoted from ARTLv1 is performed. At this time, since it is ART4 internally, a notification effect indicating that it has actually been promoted to ARTLv4 is performed instead of the effect display that has been promoted to ARTLv2. Such a notification effect indicating the actual ART level is realized, for example, by interrupting and displaying an enemy character corresponding to ARTLv4 when displaying the effect at the time of promotion. Thus, even if the player is demoted to the lowest level of ARTLv1, the player can proceed with the game with a sense of expectation that the player may actually be promoted to ARTLv4. Note that the notification effect indicating the actual ART level may be performed when, for example, promotion from ARTLv4 to ARTLv5 (specialized preparation) according to the winning result of the level-up lottery.

  As described above, according to the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

  For example, when focusing only on the display area corresponding to the left reel 3L in the display window 4, a slip lip that has a display mode shifted by one pattern from the display mode of the RT0 middle lip that maintains RT0 is maintained in RT2. RT2 maintenance lip), and it can also be used as a role for acquiring ISM points necessary for shifting from the normal state to CZ. And can eliminate the annoyance of the transition role.

  In addition, the RT2 maintenance lip is used to determine the ISM points necessary for the CZ transition, and the cherry is displayed in the middle of the display area corresponding to the left reel 3L so that the player can determine whether the BB is inside or not. When trying to stop display, if it is not inside the BB, it is also used as a role that can be stopped and displayed in the display mode constituting the RT2 maintenance lip. In other words, the RT2 maintenance lip is used as a measure of CZ transition and special role BB winning / non-winning, but it is not involved in the transition of the gaming state, so it can be prevented from becoming too advantageous for the player. .

  Also, in the ART during RT2, the symbol combination corresponding to the red bar is obtained by first stopping the right reel 3R by reverse pressing from the right end different from the pressing order from the left end when the RT2 maintenance lip is won. Can be stopped and displayed, and the number of ART games can be increased according to the winning. In other words, the RT2 maintenance lip when overlapped with the replay related to the red bar can stop and display a combination of symbols that can be added to the number of games in the order of the stop operation in ART, and is useful for adding the number of games of ART. Therefore, the RT2 maintenance lip can be used for various purposes and multipurposes as a meaningful role for the player.

  In CZ, every time the meter display point corresponding to the acquired skill point reaches a specified point (100 in this embodiment), the meter bar MB related to the meter display can be changed from the beginning, While the meter display color can be changed, in the case of a confirmed CZ in which the transition to the ART is confirmed even if the meter display point reaches the specified point, the meter bar MB is changed while the meter display color is changed. It can be prevented from changing as immutable. Thereby, even if it is not a display color indicating that it is advantageous in accordance with the acquired technique points, it is possible to enhance a sense of expectation for the technique points.

  Also, even in normal state, if you are in RT2 and hit the replay (WSP Lip, SP Lip) related to the red bar, you will go directly to ART without going through CZ, and in EXCZ, red that overlaps with RT2 maintenance Lip Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay related to the bar is not stopped and displayed in response to the reverse press, if it hits the replay related to the red bar (WSP lip, SP lip), it shifts to ART. You can move to ART without going through.

  Also, in ART2, the content of the transition from ARTLv2 to ARTLv1 is displayed as if it was promoted internally, as if it were demoted in appearance, and then it was promoted as if it was not promoted internally. As such, the contents of the transition from ARTLv1 to ARTLv2 and further from ARTLv2 to ARTLv3 are displayed, so it is possible to realize so-called ART rich in game characteristics and to eliminate monotony in ART.

  Further, every time a predetermined number of games are consumed, the CZ lottery state is changed, so that the winning probability of the CZ lottery is changed, and the state after the CZ is finished is confirmed to be ART transition in advance (confirmed CZ). Whether to win or not is determined by the CZ type lottery, and the ratio between the winning probability of such a CZ lottery and the winning probability of the CZ type lottery is made different every time a predetermined number of games are consumed according to a set value. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to guess the set value while providing a difference according to the set value.

  Further, even if the winning probability in each of the CZ lottery and the CZ type lottery varies depending on the set value, the winning probability of the CZ lottery is changed every time a predetermined number of games are consumed. Since it is difficult to find the relationship between the ease of transition to and the ease of transition to ART, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the difference due to the set value, and thus it is difficult to guess the set value.

  In addition, it is possible to carry out extra lottery using a plurality of common lottery tables (see FIG. 64) depending on different triggers in the BB gaming state and ART, so the result of the extra lottery using the common lottery table is empirical. By making it easy to associate, the expectation and interest of the game can be enhanced, and the data size of the entire table required for the extra lottery can be suppressed.

  In addition, as for the number of games that each of ART1 to 4 continues, it is guaranteed based on the loop rate as to the number of games to be executed with the specified number of games (20G in this embodiment) as one set, so-called ART games The number of games is guaranteed to be executed in units of sets, and even if the loop rate is small, the number of games that are actually continued is guaranteed in units of sets. As a result, the continuity of ART can be relaxed to some extent, and as a result It can enhance interest.

  In each of ART1 to 4, for example, promotion and demotion are repeatedly performed, so that the number of so-called ART games is surely executed in units of sets. It is possible to guarantee the number of games in a set unit while impressing the game characteristics such as, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

  In addition, even if the final game ART lottery determines that there are relatively few technique points (competition points) in CZ and it is determined that the final game ART lottery will not be transferred to ART in the final game (14G) of CZ, it is in RT2 and red If the replay related to is determined as a winning combination (WSP Lip, SP Lip), the final game revival lottery will be performed even if the replay related to the red bar does not win, and it will shift to ART by winning in this revival lottery Therefore, the expectation in so-called CZ can be enhanced.

  In addition, this invention is not limited to the structure of the said embodiment.

  For example, the main control board may be provided with a 7-segment display so that the main CPU collects so-called role ratio information and can confirm the role information by monitor display. As the role ratio information, a continuous character ratio or a character ratio between predetermined games, a continuous character ratio or a character ratio between cumulative games, an advantageous section ratio, or the like may be displayed. In the above embodiment, the winning determination line is one cross-down line. However, for example, the winning determination line is five lines, and the symbol combination corresponding to the RT0 middle lip and the symbol combination corresponding to the RT2 maintenance lip are the same. Although the symbol combinations are used, the same symbol combinations may be arranged along different winning determination lines when each display is established.

  The payout state shifts mainly by winning various lotteries, but may be transferred in accordance with, for example, winning a winning combination. The game state mainly shifts in accordance with the winning combination of the winning combination, but may be shifted in accordance with, for example, lottery corresponding to the winning combination or winning of the predetermined combination. In addition, although the process related to the ball appearance state is mainly executed by the main CPU, various processes related to the ball appearance state may be executed by the sub CPU.

[Appendix 1]
The pachislot machine of Appendix 1 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, it is detected that a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on each surface, a game medal, a coin, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “medal, etc.”) are operated and the start lever is operated by the player. , A start switch that requests the start of rotation of a plurality of reels and a stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels is detected by the player, and the rotation of the corresponding reel is requested to stop. A step switch based on the signals output from the start switch and the stop switch, and a stop switch that outputs a signal to perform, a stepping motor that is provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and transmits each driving force to each reel. A reel control unit that controls the operation of the motor and rotates and stops each reel, and the start lever is operated. Is detected, the lottery is performed based on the random number value, and the rotation of the reel is determined based on the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “internal winning combination”) and the timing at which the stop button is detected. A so-called pachislot machine that stops is known.

  A conventional gaming machine of this type has a plurality of replay times (hereinafter referred to as “RT”) having different so-called replay winning probabilities, and is provided on condition that a symbol combination related to a specific replay is stopped and displayed. Some RTs can be transferred from one RT to another, and the winning probability of a specific replay varies depending on the RT. According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to vary the ease of transition according to the RT during the stay, and it is possible to easily stratify a plurality of RTs (see, for example, JP-A-2015-77293). ).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the specific replay type that is easy to win according to RT, that is, the symbol combination of the transitional role changes, so that the change of the symbol combination of the transitional role is troublesome for the player. There was a tendency to be felt, and there was a difficulty that could reduce the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can eliminate the annoyance of a transitional role and can enhance the interest of the game.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

A gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a pachislot machine 1 described later)
A plurality of symbols are drawn, and a plurality of reels that rotate for each unit game (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R described later),
A symbol display area for displaying a part of the symbols drawn on the reels (for example, a display window 4 and a winning determination line described later);
At the start of a unit game, a winning combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a plurality of re-playing combinations (for example, replay described later),
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the timing of the stop operation on the reel, the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation is stopped to thereby display the plurality of symbols in the symbol display area. Stop control means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) for stopping and displaying a part of
A gaming state control means (for example, a main CPU 93 to be described later) capable of shifting a plurality of gaming states (for example, RT to be described later) having different replay probabilities in which the plurality of re-playing roles are determined as the internal winning combination. Etc.)
Production state control means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) capable of shifting a plurality of production states;
With
The gaming state control means includes
When the transition combination (for example, RT transition lip described later) of the plurality of combinations is determined as the internal winning combination and the symbol combination related to the transition combination is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area, the internal combination A first gaming state (for example, RT0, RT1, and the like described later) that has a relatively low probability that a specific regame role (for example, an RT2 maintenance lip described later) is determined as the winning combination. It is possible to shift to a second gaming state (for example, RT2 described later) with a higher probability that the specific re-game player will be determined than
The production state control means includes:
When the specific re-gamer is determined as the internal winning combination, from one of the plurality of performance states (for example, a normal state without an ISM point described later) to another performance state (for example, Normal state with ISM points to be described later)
The stop control means includes
When a part of the plurality of symbols is not yet stopped and displayed in the symbol display area, the plurality of symbols at the time when the stop operation corresponding to the reel that is not yet stopped and displayed is detected. Control pattern selection means (for example, described later) for uniquely selecting a control pattern corresponding to the internal winning combination from a plurality of control patterns for specifying a predetermined symbol within the drawable range with respect to the symbol display area Main CPU93 etc.)
When the stop operation corresponding to the reel that is not yet stopped and displayed is detected when a part of the plurality of symbols is not yet stopped and displayed in the symbol display area, the control pattern selection means Based on the selected control pattern, performing a control to stop and display the predetermined symbol specified in the retractable range at the time when the stop operation is detected, in the symbol display area,
The control pattern selection means includes
A specific reel among the plurality of reels in the symbol display area when a normal regame combination (for example, a later-described RT0 lip, etc.) is determined as the internal winning combination. For a specific symbol display area corresponding to (for example, a left reel 3L described later), the normal regame player is displayed for the symbol group in which the symbols constituting the normal regame player are located within the predetermined range. Normal re-game player display control pattern selection means (for example, main CPU 93 described later) for selecting a normal re-game player display control pattern for specifying a position (for example, a position to be a replay symbol in the middle stage described later);
When the specific re-gamer is determined as the internal winning combination, the specific re-playing game for the specific symbol display area with respect to the symbol group in which the symbols constituting the specific re-gamer are located within the retractable range. Specific re-game player display control pattern selection means (for example, main to be described later) for selecting a specific re-game player display control pattern for specifying a position (for example, a cross-up position to be described later) where display of the game player is established. CPU93 etc.)
Including
The normal re-game player display control pattern is a first stop display mode (for example, the left reel shown in FIG. 113A described later) when the stop operation for the specific reel is detected at least at a specific timing. In the upper, middle, and lower tiers, specify the position that will be the “Bell 3-Lip-B bar” stop display mode,
The specific re-game player display control pattern is a second stop display mode different from the first stop display mode (for example, described later) when the stop operation for the specific reel is detected at least at a specific timing. 113 (D) of FIG. 113 (D), a position that becomes a stop display mode such as “watermelon-bell 3-lip” on the upper, middle, and lower stages is specified.

  According to such a gaming machine, when paying attention to a specific symbol display area, it is possible to shift the production state while using a specific re-game player different from the normal re-game player as a role to maintain the second game state. Therefore, even a specific re-playing role that does not fall under the gaming state transition role can function as a role that enhances the interest of the player, and the troublesomeness regarding the transition role can be eliminated. Moreover, since the specific re-game player is not involved in the transition of the game state, it can be prevented that the game becomes too advantageous for the player.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The gaming state control means includes
In the first gaming state, when the normal re-playing role is determined as the internal winning combination, the first gaming state can be maintained,
In the second gaming state, when the specific re-playing role is determined as the internal winning combination, the second gaming state can be maintained,
The production state control means includes:
When a predetermined transition condition (for example, ART winning described later) is satisfied, a transition to a navigation effect state (for example, ART described later) in which the stop operation order for the plurality of reels among the plurality of rendering states can be instructed. Is possible,
In the navigation effect state, when a special replay player (for example, a replay related to a red bar described later) is determined as the internal winning combination overlapping with the specific replay player, the period of the navigation effect state is set. Including extension means that can be extended (for example, a main CPU 93 described later),
In the specific re-game player display control pattern, the special re-game player is determined to overlap with the specific re-game player as the internal winning combination, and all of the plurality of symbols are still stopped and displayed in the symbol display area. When the stop operation corresponding to a special reel (for example, a right reel 3R described later) different from the specific reel is detected, the symbols constituting the special re-gamer can be pulled in. It is possible to specify a position where the display of the special re-gamer is established for the symbol group located within the range (for example, a position where a replay related to a red bar described later is established),
In the navigation effect state, when it is determined that the period of the navigation effect state is extended, the stop operation order in which the stop operation corresponding to the special reel is performed first is instructed (for example, in the effect category described later) A cut-in display based on “target cut-in”).

  According to such a configuration, for example, in the navigation effect state in the second gaming state, when the specific replaying role and the special replaying role are overlapped, a special reel is pressed by reverse pressing different from normal according to the stop operation order instruction. The special re-gamer can be stopped and displayed in the special symbol display area so that the special re-game player can be displayed by performing the stop operation for the first time. The period of the navigation effect state can be extended according to the establishment. In other words, the specific regamer can establish the display without following the stop operation order when overlapping with the special regamer in the navigation effect state, while the special regamer determines the period of the navigation effect state. Since it is possible to establish a display as a role to extend by a different stop operation order than usual, both these specific re-game players and special re-game players are used for various purposes and multi-purposes as meaningful roles for the player be able to.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The production state control means includes:
In the second game state, when the specific re-gamer is determined as the internal winning combination, a point acquisition lottery (for example, an ISM described later) for acquiring a predetermined point (for example, an ISM point described later) is determined. Point acquisition lottery means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later),
Based on the predetermined point, the stop operation order for the plurality of reels can be instructed based on the predetermined point, provided that the predetermined point is a predetermined number or more (for example, one or more ISM points). Transition lottery means (for example, a main CPU 93, which will be described later) for performing a transition lottery (for example, a CZ lottery, which will be described later) for shifting to a chance zone where there is a possibility of transition to a navigating effect state (for example, an ART which will be described later). )When,
It is characterized by including.

  According to such a configuration, while the specific re-playing role is made a useful role for the player, it is only an opportunity to acquire a predetermined point necessary for shifting to the chance zone, and the navigation effect state is set. Since it cannot be a transitional role that makes a direct transition, it is possible to prevent the winning of the specific re-gamer from becoming too advantageous for the player.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The control pattern selection means includes
When a special combination (for example, “watermelon” as a group combination including overlapping winnings with BB1, which will be described later) is determined as the internal winning combination, the specific symbol display area In order to specify a position where the special role is displayed for a symbol group in which the symbols constituting the special role are located within the retractable range (for example, a position where “watermelon” is placed on the upper stage of the left reel described later). Special role display control pattern selection means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) for selecting the special role display control pattern of
The special combination display control pattern specifies a position to be the second stop display mode when the stop operation on the specific reel is detected at least at a specific timing, and the specific display in the symbol display area For the symbol group in which the symbols constituting the special role are not located within the retractable range for other symbol display areas corresponding to other reels (for example, the middle reel 3C described later) Is characterized by specifying a position where the display cannot be established (for example, a position where a later-described watermelon is missed).

  According to such a gaming machine, when either one of the specific re-playing role and the special role is determined as the internal winning combination, the display mode of the specific re-playing role and the special role are displayed for the specific symbol display area. Although the display mode is the same and it is not possible to determine which one is won, the special combination will be displayed if a stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing aiming at the symbols that make up the special combination in other symbol display areas. Since the symbol can be stopped and displayed in the display mode that is established, the game can be advanced without losing the special role by performing an appropriate stop operation, aiming only at the symbol that constitutes one of the roles Thus, the troublesomeness of performing the stop operation can be eliminated.

[Effect of the invention]
ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the game machine which can eliminate the troublesomeness about a transfer combination and can raise the interest of a game by extension can be provided.

[Appendix 2]
The pachislot machine of Appendix 2 is as follows.

[Technical field]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, it is detected that a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on each surface, a game medal, a coin, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “medal, etc.”) are operated and the start lever is operated by the player. , A start switch that requests the start of rotation of a plurality of reels and a stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels is detected by the player, and the rotation of the corresponding reel is requested to stop. A step switch based on the signals output from the start switch and the stop switch, and a stop switch that outputs a signal to perform, a stepping motor that is provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and transmits each driving force to each reel. A reel control unit that controls the operation of the motor and rotates and stops each reel, and the start lever is operated. Is detected, the lottery is performed based on the random number value, and the rotation of the reel is determined based on the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “internal winning combination”) and the timing at which the stop button is detected. A so-called pachislot machine that stops is known.

  Some conventional gaming machines of this type do not directly display the numerical value stored internally in a so-called chance zone (chance state), but produce an effect that displays them in a pseudo manner using meters or colors. . According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to intuitively give a sense of expectation with respect to internal numerical values (see, for example, JP-A-2016-43004).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above conventional gaming machine, if it is determined in advance that the transition from the chance state to the advantageous state is made, it is easy to produce a highly expected performance regardless of the internal numerical value. There was a risk that the sense of expectation for the production such as the color change may be lost, and the interest of the game may be reduced.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first production state, if the provision of the second production state is unconfirmed, the production mode is changed according to a predetermined production point, while the provision of the second production state is given. Even when is confirmed, the effect mode can be changed according to a predetermined effect point. That is, when it is determined in advance that the second performance state is to be given, it is also assumed that the production mode does not change without increasing the predetermined production points, but the first production point is not related to the first production point. Even if the production mode does not change from the expectation that the 2nd production state may be provided, it is possible to increase the expectation for the provision of the second production state.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can enhance a sense of expectation for performance and, in turn, can enhance the interest of the game.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

A gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a pachislot machine 1 described later)
A gaming state in which a re-game player (for example, a replay to be described later) is determined as an internal winning combination and can be shifted from one game state to another game state among a plurality of game states having different re-play probabilities Control means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later);
Production state control means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) capable of shifting from one of the plurality of production states to another production state;
With
The production state control means includes:
In a predetermined period (for example, a CZ1-13 game described later) in a first effect state (for example, CZ described later) among the plurality of effect states, a predetermined value is determined according to the combination determined as the internal winning combination. Point accumulation means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) capable of accumulating performance points (for example, technique points described later);
After the predetermined period of time in the first effect state (for example, a CZ14 game described later), the plurality of effect states from the first effect state based on the predetermined effect points accumulated by the point accumulation means. Among them, an effect state provision determining means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) capable of determining whether or not to provide a second effect state (for example, ART described later),
Effect mode control means (for example, described later) capable of changing the effect mode (for example, meter display color described later) suggesting the effect point according to the predetermined effect point accumulated by the point accumulating means. Sub CPU102),
Including
The effect state control means can determine in advance that the second effect state is to be given in advance in the predetermined period in the first effect state (for example, a main CPU 93 that performs CZ type lottery described later). Including
Even when it is determined that the second effect state is to be given by the prior confirmation means (for example, when “confirmed CZ” is determined by a CZ type lottery described later, etc.) ), It is possible to change the effect mode according to the predetermined effect point.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the first production state, if the provision of the second production state is unconfirmed, the production mode is changed according to a predetermined production point, while the provision of the second production state is given. Even when is confirmed, the effect mode can be changed according to a predetermined effect point. That is, when it is determined in advance that the second performance state is to be given, it is also assumed that the production mode does not change without increasing the predetermined production points, but the first production point is not related to the first production point. Even if the production mode does not change from the expectation that the 2nd production state may be provided, it is possible to increase the expectation for the provision of the second production state.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The production mode control means includes:
As the production mode, every time the predetermined production point reaches a specified point (for example, “5”, “10”, “15”, “20”, etc. as skill points), the display color on the production is stepped. (For example, the meter display color to be described later changes from blue to yellow to green to red to rainbow, etc.), and the display value on the production can be changed step by step (for example, the meter display to be described later) Change to over 100 points),
A special numerical value that can be determined to add a special numerical value (for example, a CZ point described later) to the display numerical value when it is determined that the second effect state is to be given by the prior determination means. Addition determining means (main CPU 93 etc. for performing a determined CZ point distribution lottery described later),
When the special numerical value addition determining means determines to add the special numerical value, the effect mode control means adds the special numerical value and changes the display numerical value.

  According to such a configuration, when it is determined that the second effect state is to be given, a special numerical value is added even if there is no change in the display color on the effect according to a predetermined effect point. Since a relatively large display numerical value may be displayed in the production, even when the display color and the display numerical value show a change that does not correspond to each other, it is possible to enhance a sense of expectation for giving the second production state.

[Effect of the invention]
ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the game machine which can raise the expectation with respect to performance and can raise the interest of a game by extension can be provided.

[Appendix 3]
The pachislot machine of Appendix 3 is as follows.

[Technical field]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, it is detected that a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on each surface, a game medal, a coin, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “medal, etc.”) are operated and the start lever is operated by the player. , A start switch that requests the start of rotation of a plurality of reels and a stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels is detected by the player, and the rotation of the corresponding reel is requested to stop. A step switch based on the signals output from the start switch and the stop switch, and a stop switch that outputs a signal to perform, a stepping motor that is provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and transmits each driving force to each reel. A reel control unit that controls the operation of the motor and rotates and stops each reel, and the start lever is operated. Is detected, the lottery is performed based on the random number value, and the rotation of the reel is determined based on the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “internal winning combination”) and the timing at which the stop button is detected. A so-called pachislot machine that stops is known.

  A conventional gaming machine of this type has a chance zone (hereinafter referred to as “CZ”) that is easily determined to shift to a so-called assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”), and the transition to this CZ is possible. When determined, there is one configured to perform navigation so as to transit to a specific so-called replay time (hereinafter referred to as “RT”) for executing CZ, and to execute CZ at the specific RT. According to such a gaming machine, the replay winning probability in the CZ can be designed according to the specification of the CZ, the degree of freedom of design and development can be increased, and the interest of the game in the CZ can be increased. (For example, refer to JP-A-2016-25879).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that there is a lack of variation in production just by activating one CZ, which may reduce the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can be rich in production variations and can enhance the interest of the game.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

A gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a pachislot machine 1 described later)
A plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are drawn and rotated (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R described later),
A symbol display area (for example, a display window 4 described later) for displaying a part of the symbols drawn on the reels;
A winning combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations;
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the timing of the stop operation on the reel, the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation is stopped to thereby display the plurality of symbols in the symbol display area. Stop control means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) for stopping and displaying a part of
A gaming state control means (for example, a game state control means capable of shifting a plurality of gaming states with different replay probabilities determined as the internal winning combination is a replaying combination (for example, replay described later) of the plurality of combinations. A main CPU 93 described later),
Production state control means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) capable of shifting a plurality of production states;
With
The gaming state control means includes
When the transition combination (for example, RT transition lip described later) among the plurality of combinations is determined as the internal winning combination, and the symbol combination related to the transition combination is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area, the plurality of combinations Transition to a second gaming state (for example, RT2 described later) having a higher replay probability than a first gaming state (for example, RT0, RT1 described later) having a relatively low replay probability among the gaming states of Is possible,
The production state control means includes:
In a first effect state (for example, a normal effect state described later) of the plurality of effect states, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the second effect state from the first effect state to the second effect state. (For example, a CZ effect state described later)
A third effect different from the first effect state and the second effect state among the plurality of effect states when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the second game state is satisfied in the first effect state. It is possible to shift to a state (for example, an EXCZ effect state described later).

  According to such a gaming machine, if the first game state is also in the second game state and the predetermined condition is satisfied, the state shifts to the third effect state different from the second effect state. Can increase the interest of the game.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that can be maintained when a specific re-gamer (for example, an RT2 maintenance lip described later) of the plurality of re-games is determined as the internal winning combination,
The first gaming state is a gaming state in which the specific re-game is not determined as the internal winning combination,
The production state control means includes:
In the first effect state, when a predetermined effect lottery (for example, CZ lottery described later) is won as the predetermined condition, and the first effect state is shifted to the second effect state. In the second gaming state, it is possible to shift to the third effect state,
In the third effect state, when the specific replaying role is determined as the internal winning combination, a fourth effect state (for example, described later) that assists winning of the plurality of small roles among the plurality of effect states. It is possible to shift to ART).

  According to such a configuration, when transitioning from the first effect state to the fourth effect state through the third effect state, since the second game state has a high replay probability, the so-called preparation period does not pass. You can move to ART.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be rich in production variations, and that can enhance the interest of the game.

[Appendix 4]
The pachislot machine of appendix 4 is as follows.

[Technical field]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, it is detected that a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on each surface, a game medal, a coin, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “medal, etc.”) are operated and the start lever is operated by the player. , A start switch that requests the start of rotation of a plurality of reels and a stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels is detected by the player, and the rotation of the corresponding reel is requested to stop. A step switch based on the signals output from the start switch and the stop switch, and a stop switch that outputs a signal to perform, a stepping motor that is provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and transmits each driving force to each reel. A reel control unit that controls the operation of the motor and rotates and stops each reel, and the start lever is operated. Is detected, the lottery is performed based on the random number value, and the rotation of the reel is determined based on the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “internal winning combination”) and the timing at which the stop button is detected. A so-called pachislot machine that stops is known.

  In this type of conventional gaming machine, the right (number of games) of so-called assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”) is collectively managed in units of a set, and when a predetermined condition during AT is satisfied, Some have a so-called extra function that grants AT rights in units of sets. According to such a gaming machine, the AT right is a set unit, and the number of AT games for at least one set is guaranteed. An expectation can be raised (for example, refer Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-200197).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above conventional gaming machines, only simple game characteristics are exhibited because attention is paid only to whether or not the AT right remains in units of sets, and some players tend to feel monotonous, There was a problem that could reduce the fun of gaming.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and provides a gaming machine that can eliminate monotonousness by realizing an ART rich in game characteristics, and thus can enhance the interest of the game. For the purpose.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

A gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a pachislot machine 1 described later)
A plurality of symbols are drawn, and a plurality of reels that rotate for each unit game (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R described later),
A symbol display area (for example, a display window 4 described later) for displaying a part of the symbols drawn on the reels;
At the start of a unit game, a winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a plurality of small combinations (for example, a small combination described later) and a plurality of re-playing combinations (for example, a replay described later). For example, a main CPU 93 described later)
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the timing of the stop operation on the reel, the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation is stopped to thereby display the plurality of symbols in the symbol display area. Stop control means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) for stopping and displaying a part of
A gaming state control means (for example, a main CPU 93 to be described later) capable of shifting a plurality of gaming states (for example, RT to be described later) having different replay probabilities in which the plurality of re-playing roles are determined as the internal winning combination. Etc.)
Production state control means (for example, a main CPU 93, a sub CPU 102, etc., which will be described later) capable of shifting a plurality of production states;
With
In the first effect state (for example, CZ described later) of the plurality of effect states, the effect state control means is configured to win a prize for the small part from the first effect state. Second assisting state (eg, ART described later) to assist can be given,
The second performance state can be promoted by one step every time a predetermined internal condition (for example, a level-up winning described later) is satisfied, and a predetermined number of games (for example, It is composed of a plurality of layers (for example, ARTLv1 to 4 described later) that can be demoted one step each time digesting 20G described later)
The effect state control means is an effect display that indicates a layer that has been demoted one step in a pseudo manner when the predetermined internal condition is satisfied in a specific layer (for example, ARTLv2 described later) of the plurality of layers. After that, when the predetermined number of games is consumed without satisfying the predetermined internal condition, an effect control means (for example, described later) that can display an effect indicating the specific hierarchy as a one-step promotion A sub CPU 102).

  According to such a gaming machine, even if the promotion is internally promoted in a specific hierarchy in the second performance state, the hierarchy is displayed as if it was demoted in a pseudo manner, and then the promotion cannot be promoted internally. However, since a specific hierarchy is displayed as if it has been returned by promotion, so-called ART rich in game characteristics can be realized, and monotony in ART can be eliminated.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
While the production control means performs the production display step by step so as to show the specific layer as a one-step promotion by further demoting the specific layer from the specific layer by satisfying the predetermined internal condition In addition, when the predetermined internal condition is satisfied twice or more, in the effect display showing the specific hierarchy after the one-stage promotion, it is possible to notify that the hierarchy is actually higher than the specific hierarchy. It is characterized by being.

  According to such a configuration, until a predetermined level is satisfied, a stage where a stage is pseudo-degraded from a specific hierarchy and further staged in a pseudo-stage is returned to a specific hierarchy. In addition, if the predetermined internal condition is satisfied twice or more, even if the specific hierarchy is returned again, it is notified that the actual hierarchy is actually two or more levels higher than the specific hierarchy. Even if the display is performed, the game can be advanced with the expectation that it may have been promoted to two or more levels, and this can also enhance the interest of the game. In addition, in a hierarchy that is demoted one step from a specific hierarchy, there is a pseudo-promotion that makes it appear that it is easier to promote than if promoted according to actual internal conditions, and the degree of expectation for promotion Can be increased.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can eliminate monotonousness by realizing an ART rich in game characteristics, and thus can enhance the interest of the game.

[Appendix 5]
The pachislot machine of appendix 5 is as follows.

[Technical field]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, it is detected that a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on each surface, a game medal, a coin, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “medal, etc.”) are operated and the start lever is operated by the player. , A start switch that requests the start of rotation of a plurality of reels and a stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels is detected by the player, and the rotation of the corresponding reel is requested to stop. A step switch based on the signals output from the start switch and the stop switch, and a stop switch that outputs a signal to perform, a stepping motor that is provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and transmits each driving force to each reel. A reel control unit that controls the operation of the motor and rotates and stops each reel, and the start lever is operated. Is detected, the lottery is performed based on the random number value, and the rotation of the reel is determined based on the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “internal winning combination”) and the timing at which the stop button is detected. A so-called pachislot machine that stops is known.

  Some conventional gaming machines of this type perform lottery such as so-called assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”) based on a set value for determining the winning probability of a winning combination. According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to influence the lottery on the production other than the lottery of the combination depending on the set value, and for example, it is possible to cause a relatively large difference in the so-called payout rate (for example, JP, 2010-167197, A).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, the conventional gaming machines tend to be easy to guess the set value from the lottery result corresponding to the set value, and there is a problem that the interest of the game may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and it is possible to make it difficult to guess the set value while providing a difference according to the set value, and thus to enhance the interest of the game. The purpose is to provide a machine.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

A gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a pachislot machine 1 described later)
A plurality of symbols are drawn, and a plurality of reels that rotate for each unit game (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R described later),
A symbol display area (for example, a display window 4 described later) for displaying a part of the symbols drawn on the reels;
At the start of a unit game, a winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a plurality of small combinations (for example, a small combination described later) and a plurality of re-playing combinations (for example, a replay described later). For example, a main CPU 93 described later)
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the timing of the stop operation on the reel, the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation is stopped to thereby display the plurality of symbols in the symbol display area. Stop control means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) for stopping and displaying a part of
Production state control means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) capable of shifting a plurality of production states;
With
The production state control means includes:
In the first effect state (for example, a normal state described later) among the plurality of effect states, when there are a predetermined number or more of predetermined effect points (for example, an ISM point described later), the first effect state is changed. Production state transition determining means (for example, a main CPU 93 performing CZ lottery described later) capable of determining a transition to a second presentation state (for example, CZ described later) among the plurality of presentation states;
Including
The production state transition determining means can change the possibility of transition to the second production state every time a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games described later) are consumed, and in the first production state, It is determined according to a predetermined condition (for example, winning “determined CZ” by a CZ type lottery described later, etc.) to give a third effect state (for example, ART described later, etc.) after the end of the second effect state. Is possible,
The ratio between the possibility of transition to the second performance state and the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition can be changed every time the predetermined number of games is consumed according to a set value.

  According to such a gaming machine, the possibility of transition from the first effect state to the second effect state is changed every time a predetermined number of games are consumed, and the effect state after the end of the second effect state is also changed in advance. It is determined by satisfying a predetermined condition whether or not to determine as the three effect state, and the ratio between the possibility of transition to the second effect state and the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is set according to the set value Since it can be changed each time the predetermined number of games is consumed, it is difficult to guess the set value while providing a difference according to the set value.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The third effect state is an effect state in which the winning of the small role can be assisted.
The possibility of transition to the second performance state or the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is the winning probability by each lottery (for example, the winning probability by a CZ lottery described later, the winning probability of a confirmed CZ by a CZ type lottery described later, etc.) ) Can be changed according to the set value.

  According to such a configuration, the possibility of transition to the second performance state and the possibility of the predetermined condition for confirming the transition can be changed according to the set value as the winning probability by each lottery, For example, if the winning probability of the lottery for the transition to the second effect state is changed every time a predetermined number of games are consumed, the ease of shifting to the second effect state and the ease of giving the third effect state thereafter This makes it difficult to identify the difference between the set values, and thus makes it difficult to guess the set value.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of making it difficult to guess the set value while providing a difference according to the set value, and thus enhancing the interest of the game.

[Appendix 6]
The pachislot machine of appendix 6 is as follows.

[Technical field]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, it is detected that a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on each surface, a game medal, a coin, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “medal, etc.”) are operated and the start lever is operated by the player. , A start switch that requests the start of rotation of a plurality of reels and a stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels is detected by the player, and the rotation of the corresponding reel is requested to stop. A step switch based on the signals output from the start switch and the stop switch, and a stop switch that outputs a signal to perform, a stepping motor that is provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and transmits each driving force to each reel. A reel control unit that controls the operation of the motor and rotates and stops each reel, and the start lever is operated. Is detected, the lottery is performed based on the random number value, and the rotation of the reel is determined based on the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “internal winning combination”) and the timing at which the stop button is detected. A so-called pachislot machine that stops is known.

  Some conventional gaming machines of this type perform lottery (additional lottery) for extending the period (number of games) of a so-called assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”). According to such a gaming machine, the interest of the game can be enhanced because the AT period becomes indefinite (see, for example, JP-A-2015-77293). In recent years, there have been games that have been further enhanced by providing a plurality of opportunities to extend the AT period.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the plurality of lottery tables used for the lottery are different for each of various occasions, the size of the data including the plurality of lottery tables is likely to be enlarged, and other stored data and processing are performed. There was a difficult point to press.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of the game while suppressing the data size.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

A gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a pachislot machine 1 described later)
A plurality of symbols are drawn, and a plurality of reels that rotate for each unit game (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R described later),
A symbol display area (for example, a display window 4 described later) for displaying a part of the symbols drawn on the reels;
At the start of a unit game, a winning combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations,
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the timing of the stop operation on the reel, the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation is stopped to thereby display the plurality of symbols in the symbol display area. Stop control means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) for stopping and displaying a part of
Production state control means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) capable of shifting a plurality of production states;
With
The production state control means includes:
When a predetermined grant condition is satisfied, it is possible to grant a navigation effect state (for example, an ART described later) that assists the winning of the internal winning combination,
In the navigation effect state, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, an add-on means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) that can add a period of the navigation effect state with a predetermined additional lottery (for example, an additional game number lottery described later). )
The adding means is
A plurality of lottery tables (for example, an additional game number lottery table described later) used in the predetermined additional lottery are associated with a plurality of table numbers (for example, tables 1 to 7 described later),
By performing the predetermined addition lottery using the corresponding lottery table by designating the table number according to the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means,
At least one of the plurality of table numbers can be specified in a plurality of different addition states (for example, normal, high accuracy, super high accuracy, etc. as an addition state described later) in the navigation effect state. It is characterized by that.

  According to such a gaming machine, even when different internal winning combinations are determined in different addition states during the navigation effect state, the same lottery table can be used for the addition lottery by designating the same table number. Since it may be performed, it is possible to make it easier to empirically associate the number of additional games derived from the same lottery table as a result of the lottery, and as a result, the expectation and interest in the game can be enhanced, and The data size of the entire necessary table can also be suppressed.

In a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The production state control means includes:
A special combination (for example, BB1, which will be described later) is determined as the internal winning combination by the winning combination determination means, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination during the special carry-over of the special combination (for example, inside the BB, which will be described later) Is stopped in the symbol display area, it is possible to shift to a special effect state (for example, a normal BB described later) advantageous to the player,
In a non-navigation effect state (for example, CZ described later) that can be shifted to the navigation effect state without assisting the winning of the internal winning combination, for example, when the predetermined granting condition (for example, ART winning described later) is satisfied. Can be given the navigation effect state,
In the navigation effect state, it is possible to control an additional specialization period (for example, PTR described later) for specially adding the period of the navigation effect state,
The adding means has a plurality of selection tables (for example, an adding lottery A table, an adding lottery B table, which will be described later) for selecting one table number from the plurality of table numbers by lottery,
For the plurality of selection tables, a first selection table (for example, an extra lottery A table described later) used in the added state and the added specialization period in the navigation effect state and the special effect state are used. A second selection table (for example, an extra lottery B table described later),
The adding means uses a specific table number (for example, tables 5 and 6 to be described later) using the first selection table when the first combination (for example, a strong cherry to be described later) is won during the additional specialization period. ) Can be selected, and the second selection table is used to identify the second combination that is different from the first combination in the special performance state (for example, an SP lip, a WSP lip described later) The table number can be selected.

  According to such a configuration, a plurality of lottery tables are commonly used in the extra lottery for the navigation effect state and the special effect state. In the extra lottery for the navigation effect state, the first selection table is used for the first role. While a specific table number can be selected at the time of winning, in the extra lottery in the special performance state, the same table number is selected using the second selection table even when the second winning combination is different from the first winning combination. Since it is possible, it is possible to prevent monotonous determination of the extra period of the navigation effect state even by lottery. In addition, since the lottery is performed using two types of tables such as a lottery table and a selection table, even when the probability denominator is set to 65536 for the entire lottery probability using the two tables, for example, lottery values defined in the respective tables. Can be regulated to a relatively small value up to 256, and the data size of each table can be effectively suppressed.

[Effect of the invention]
ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the game machine which can raise the interest of a game can be provided, suppressing data size.

[Appendix 7]
The pachislot machine of appendix 7 is as follows.

[Technical field]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, it is detected that a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on each surface, a game medal, a coin, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “medal, etc.”) are operated and the start lever is operated by the player. , A start switch that requests the start of rotation of a plurality of reels and a stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels is detected by the player, and the rotation of the corresponding reel is requested to stop. A step switch based on the signals output from the start switch and the stop switch, and a stop switch that outputs a signal to perform, a stepping motor that is provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and transmits each driving force to each reel. A reel control unit that controls the operation of the motor and rotates and stops each reel, and the start lever is operated. Is detected, the lottery is performed based on the random number value, and the rotation of the reel is determined based on the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “internal winning combination”) and the timing at which the stop button is detected. A so-called pachislot machine that stops is known.

  In this type of conventional gaming machine, the right (number of games) of so-called assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”) is managed collectively as a set unit, and after one set of ATs is completed, AT is executed again Some of them decide whether or not to do so by continuous lottery. According to such a gaming machine, it is difficult to predict how long the AT will continue, so it is possible to increase the expectation for the continuation of the AT (see, for example, JP 2010-167197 A).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above conventional gaming machine, the probability of continuation of ART as a result of continuous lottery is relatively low from the profit balance between the game store and the player, and the frequency of non-continuation is increased, so As a result, there is a problem that the operating rate of the gaming machine tends to be lowered.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide an amusement machine that enhances the interest of continuity of ART and consequently prevents a reduction in operating rate.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

A gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a pachislot machine 1 described later)
A plurality of symbols are drawn, and a plurality of reels that rotate for each unit game (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R described later),
A symbol display area (for example, a display window 4 described later) for displaying a part of the symbols drawn on the reels;
At the start of a unit game, a winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a plurality of small combinations (for example, a small combination described later) and a plurality of re-playing combinations (for example, a replay described later). For example, a main CPU 93 described later)
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the timing of the stop operation on the reel, the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation is stopped to thereby display the plurality of symbols in the symbol display area. Stop control means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) for stopping and displaying a part of
Production state control means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) capable of shifting a plurality of production states;
With
The effect state control means is configured to perform a predetermined period when a predetermined provision condition (for example, an ART winning described later) is satisfied in a first effect state (for example, CZ described later) of the plurality of effect states. (For example, 20G, which will be described later) can be given a second production state (for example, ART, which will be described later) that can be digested as a set,
The production state control means includes:
Continuation rate determining means (for example, performing ART grade lottery described later) that can determine a continuation rate (for example, grades, loop rates, etc., described later) for continuing the second production state even after the predetermined period is exceeded. CPU93 etc.)
Based on the continuation rate determined by the continuation rate determination means, continuation determination means (for example, a loop lottery described later) that can determine whether or not the second performance state is continued even after the predetermined period is exceeded. Main CPU 93 to perform)
Regardless of the determination result by the continuation determination means, a guarantee count determination means (for example, loop guarantee count described later) that can be determined as a guarantee count to continue a predetermined number of sets for the period of the second effect state based on the continuation rate A main CPU 93 that performs lottery),
The guaranteed number of times determining means is specific information different from the continuation rate determined by the continuation rate determining means (for example, a grade described later) when the second effect state is first given in the first effect state. The guaranteed number of times can be determined based on a common first time or the like.

  According to such a gaming machine, for a period during which the second effect state continues, for example, when the second effect state is given, a predetermined period (for example, 20G) is set based on the continuation rate determined to be changeable. Even if it is not decided to continue beyond, if it is decided to continue the predetermined number of sets as the guaranteed number of times based on specific information, it can be continued, so there is a possibility that the second performance state will not continue By suppressing it, the continuity of the so-called ART can be improved, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The second effect state is an effect state that assists the winning of the small role, and can be promoted by one step when a predetermined promotion condition (for example, winning by a level-up lottery described later) is satisfied. Are configured by a plurality of layers (for example, ARTLv1 to 4 described later) that can be demoted in one stage when satisfying the demoting conditions (for example, the winning of the level-up lottery described later and the prescribed number of games is consumed),
A specific hierarchy (for example, later-described ARTLv2 or the like) of the plurality of hierarchies is a hierarchy lower than or equal to a hierarchy that shifts when the second performance state is given,
The continuation determination means and the guarantee count determination means can determine the continuation count and the guarantee count for the specific hierarchy when the transition to the specific hierarchy is first made.

  According to such a configuration, in the second performance state, an effect is performed in which a plurality of hierarchies are promoted and demoted one step at a time, and the same game characteristics as when a predetermined period continues during the promotion. On the other hand, even if demoted to a specific tier lower than the first transitioned tier, there is a possibility that a continuation or guaranteed number of continuations will be granted for a given period of that particular tier. The possibility of so-called run-through in the hierarchy can be effectively suppressed.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest with respect to the continuity of the ART and thus prevents a reduction in the operation rate.

[Appendix 8]
The pachislot machine of appendix 8 is as follows.

[Technical field]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, it is detected that a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on each surface, a game medal, a coin, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “medal, etc.”) are operated and the start lever is operated by the player. , A start switch that requests the start of rotation of a plurality of reels and a stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels is detected by the player, and the rotation of the corresponding reel is requested to stop. A step switch based on the signals output from the start switch and the stop switch, and a stop switch that outputs a signal to perform, a stepping motor that is provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and transmits each driving force to each reel. A reel control unit that controls the operation of the motor and rotates and stops each reel, and the start lever is operated. Is detected, the lottery is performed based on the random number value, and the rotation of the reel is determined based on the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “internal winning combination”) and the timing at which the stop button is detected. A so-called pachislot machine that stops is known.

  This type of conventional gaming machine is provided with a so-called chance zone (hereinafter referred to as “CZ”), points are given until the CZ is completed, and whether or not the points exceed a predetermined value in the final game of the CZ. In some cases, a so-called assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”) is set as a carryover point. According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by acquiring many points with the CZ (see, for example, JP-A-2014-151020).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above conventional gaming machine, if a point exceeding a predetermined value is not obtained in CZ, there is a risk that the feeling of expectation may be lost due to a low stage of advantage in production, which may reduce the interest of the game There were difficulties.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the production state by leaving the possibility that the advantage in production will be high, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. The purpose is to provide a machine.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

A gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a pachislot machine 1 described later)
A plurality of symbols are drawn, and a plurality of reels that rotate for each unit game (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R described later),
A symbol display area (for example, a display window 4 described later) for displaying a part of the symbols drawn on the reels;
At the start of a unit game, a winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a plurality of small combinations (for example, a small combination described later) and a plurality of re-playing combinations (for example, a replay described later). For example, a main CPU 93 described later)
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the timing of the stop operation on the reel, the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation is stopped to thereby display the plurality of symbols in the symbol display area. Stop control means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) for stopping and displaying a part of
Production state control means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) capable of shifting a plurality of production states;
With
The production state control means includes:
In a predetermined period (for example, a CZ1-13 game described later) in a first effect state (for example, CZ described later) among the plurality of effect states, a predetermined value is determined according to the combination determined as the internal winning combination. Point accumulation means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) capable of accumulating performance points (for example, technique points described later);
After the elapse of the predetermined period in the first effect state (for example, a CZ14 game, which will be described later), the second effect state (from the first effect state to the second effect state (based on the predetermined effect point) ( For example, an effect state provision determining means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) capable of determining whether or not to provide an ART described later)
Effect control means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) for controlling a predetermined effect according to the result determined by the effect state giving determination means;
Including
Even if it determines that the said 2nd production state is not provided after the said predetermined period progress in the said 1st production state, the said production | presentation state provision determination means will carry out predetermined | prescribed resurrection lottery (for example, according to the said internal winning combination) The final game revival lottery described below is performed, and when the predetermined revival lottery is won, it can be determined that the second effect state is to be given.

  According to such a gaming machine, even if it is determined that the predetermined effect points accumulated in the predetermined period of the first effect state are relatively few and the second effect state is not given after the predetermined period has elapsed, the predetermined period When winning with a predetermined rebirth lottery according to the internal winning combination after the lapse, the effect that the second effect state is given is performed, so the expectation of the effect state by leaving the possibility that the advantage in the effect will be increased Can be increased.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The point accumulating unit is configured to perform a period from the predetermined initial game (for example, the CZ1 game) in the first effect state to the game immediately before the final game (for example, the CZ13 game) for the predetermined period. In the above, the predetermined production points can be accumulated,
The effect state assignment determining means is configured to determine the first effect point based on the predetermined effect point regardless of the internal winning combination in the final game (for example, CZ14 game) after the predetermined period has elapsed. While it is possible to determine whether or not to give two stage effects, it is possible to determine that the second stage state is to be given based on the result of the predetermined revival lottery according to the internal winning combination. To do.

  According to such a configuration, from the first game in the first production state to the game immediately before the final game, predetermined production points are accumulated according to the internal winning combination, while the final game in the first production state Then, it is determined whether or not to give the second effect state using the predetermined effect points accumulated regardless of the winning combination, and even if it is determined not to give it, the internal winning combination in the final game is determined. Accordingly, there is a possibility that the second effect state is given by a predetermined rebirth lottery. As a result, the internal winning combination determined repeatedly from the first stage of the first stage state to the final game can be effectively used for lottery in the stage, and the directing according to the internal winning combination without leaving the first game to the final game. Can be executed.

[Effect of the invention]
ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the expectation with respect to a production | presentation state can be raised by leaving the possibility that an advantage on production will become high, and the game machine which can raise the interest of a game by extension can be provided.

[Others]
As a gaming machine, for example, a pachislot machine as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-151020 is also known. However, since this pachislot machine does not have a configuration or function as a gaming machine as in the present invention, it has not been possible to improve interest. This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, and it aims at providing the game machine which can aim at the improvement of interest.

1 Pachi-slot machine 3L, 3C, 3R Reel 4 Display window 11 Liquid crystal display device 16 Start lever 17L, 17C, 17R Stop button 41 Main control board 42 Sub-control board 64 Start switch 65 Stop switch board 76 ROM cartridge board 93 Main CPU
94 Main ROM
95 Main RAM
102 Sub CPU
103 Sub RAM

Claims (2)

A plurality of symbols are drawn, a plurality of reels rotating for each unit game,
A symbol display area for displaying a part of the symbols drawn on the reels;
A winning combination determination means for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a plurality of small combinations and a plurality of re-playing combinations at the start of a unit game;
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the timing of the stop operation on the reel, the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation is stopped to thereby display the plurality of symbols in the symbol display area. Stop control means for displaying a part of the stop,
Production state control means capable of shifting a plurality of production states;
With
The production state control means includes:
Point accumulating means capable of accumulating predetermined effect points according to the combination determined as the internal winning combination in a predetermined period in the first effect state of the plurality of effect states;
An effect capable of determining whether or not to give the second effect state of the plurality of effect states from the first effect state based on the predetermined effect point after the elapse of the predetermined period in the first effect state. State grant determination means;
Effect control means for controlling a predetermined effect according to the result determined by the effect state giving determination means;
Including
Even if it determines that the said 2nd production state is not provided after the said predetermined period progress in the said 1st production state, the said production | presentation state provision determination means performs a predetermined restoration lottery according to the said internal winning combination, A gaming machine characterized in that it can be determined that the second performance state is to be given when the predetermined revival lottery is won. The point accumulating means is capable of accumulating the predetermined effect points between the predetermined initial game in the first effect state and the game immediately before the final game as the predetermined period,
Whether or not the effect state grant determining means grants the second effect state based on the predetermined effect point regardless of the internal winning combination in the final game in the first effect state after the predetermined period has elapsed. The game according to claim 1, wherein it is possible to determine whether to give the second effect state based on a result of the predetermined revival lottery according to the internal winning combination. Machine.

Images